Mercedes - B-Class - Owners Manual - 2017 - 2017 (3)

Order no. P242 0017 13 Part no. 242 584 88 00 Edition A 2017 B-Class Electric Drive Operator's Manual É2425848800gËÍ 2425848800 B-Class Electric Drive Operator's Manual Symbols In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession X indicate an instruction with several steps. This symbol tells you where you can (Y page) find more information about a topic. Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the play multifunction display/multimedia display. X Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 14.10.2015 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi- media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets. You can also use the Mercedes-Benz Guides App: Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2425848800 É2425848800gËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 4 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 21 Introduction ........................................... 21 Operation ............................................... 21 Introduction ......................................... Protecting the environment ................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... Operator's Manual ................................. Service and vehicle operation ................ Operating safety .................................... QR codes for the rescue card ................ Data stored in the vehicle ...................... Information on copyright ....................... 22 22 22 23 23 24 28 28 29 At a glance ........................................... Cockpit .................................................. Instrument cluster ................................. Multifunction steering wheel ................. Center console ...................................... Door control panel ................................. Overhead control panel ......................... 31 31 32 33 34 36 37 Safety ................................................... Panic alarm ............................................ Occupant safety .................................... Children in the vehicle ........................... Pets in the vehicle ................................. Driving safety systems ........................... Protection against theft ......................... 38 38 38 52 58 58 64 Opening and closing ........................... SmartKey ............................................... Doors ..................................................... Cargo compartment ............................... Side windows ......................................... 66 66 72 74 75 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... Correct driver's seat position ................ Seats ..................................................... Steering wheel ....................................... Mirrors ................................................... Memory function ................................... 79 79 79 83 83 85 Lights and windshield wipers ............ Exterior lighting ..................................... Interior lighting ...................................... Replacing bulbs ..................................... Windshield wipers .................................. 87 87 89 90 95 Climate control .................................... 99 Overview of climate control systems ..... 99 Operating the climate control systems .................................................... 100 Air vents .............................................. 106 Driving and parking .......................... Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... Driving ................................................. Transmission ....................................... High-voltage battery ............................ Parking ................................................ Driving tips .......................................... Driving systems ................................... 108 108 108 111 117 128 131 136 On-board computer and displays .... Important safety notes ........................ Displays and operation ........................ Menus and submenus ......................... Display messages ................................ Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 152 152 152 156 167 Multimedia system ........................... General notes ...................................... Important safety notes ........................ Function restrictions ............................ Operating system ................................ 201 201 201 201 202 Stowage and features ...................... Loading guidelines ............................... Stowage areas ..................................... Features .............................................. 207 207 207 216 Maintenance and care ...................... Engine compartment ........................... ASSYST PLUS ...................................... Care ..................................................... 231 231 233 234 190 Contents Breakdown assistance ..................... Where will I find...? .............................. Flat tire ................................................ Batteries .............................................. Jump-starting ....................................... Towing ................................................. Fuses ................................................... 241 241 241 246 249 251 254 Wheels and tires ............................... Important safety notes ........................ Operation ............................................ Winter operation .................................. Tire pressure ....................................... Loading the vehicle .............................. All about wheels and tires ................... Changing a wheel ................................ Wheel and tire combinations ............... 257 257 257 259 260 266 269 275 279 Technical data ................................... Information regarding technical data ... Vehicle electronics .............................. Identification plates ............................. Service products and filling capacities ...................................................... Vehicle data ......................................... 281 281 281 282 283 286 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 168 Function/notes ................................ 59 Important safety notes .................... 59 Warning lamp ................................. 193 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 52 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 206 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 100 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating .............. 162 Display message ............................ 174 Function/notes ................................ 60 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64 Additional speedometer ................... 165 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Adjusting the volume Audio 20 ........................................ 202 COMAND ....................................... 202 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 50 Display message ............................ 176 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 44 Important safety notes .................... 43 Introduction ..................................... 43 Knee bag .......................................... 44 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 39 Side impact air bag .......................... 45 Window curtain air bag .................... 45 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 106 Rear ............................................... 106 Setting the center air vents ........... 106 Setting the side air vents ............... 106 Air-conditioning system see Climate control Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 65 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 65 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Antenna ................................................ 26 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Ashtray ............................................... 217 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 162 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 162 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 233 Driving abroad ............................... 234 Hiding a service message .............. 233 Information about Service ............. 234 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 234 Service message ............................ 233 Special service requirements ......... 234 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 65 Function ........................................... 65 Switching off the alarm .................... 65 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 163 Display message ............................ 182 Function/notes ............................. 148 Audio 20 Switching on/off ........................... 202 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 160 Audio system see separate operating instructions Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Index AUTO lights Display message ............................ 180 see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... 234 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 87 Automatic transmission Display message ............................ 186 B Back button ....................................... 202 Backup lamp Display message ............................ 179 Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Bag hook ............................................ 212 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 69 Important safety notes .................... 68 Replacing ......................................... 69 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 248 Display message ............................ 181 Important safety notes .................. 246 Jump starting ................................. 249 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 163 Display message ............................ 183 Notes/function .............................. 150 Blootooth® Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 206 Bluetooth® Searching for a mobile phone ........ 205 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Telephony ...................................... 204 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 173 Notes ............................................. 284 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Display message ............................ 178 Brake system Driving safety systems ..................... 64 Brakes ABS .................................................. 59 BAS .................................................. 59 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 284 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 61 Display message ............................ 168 EBD .................................................. 63 Hill start assist ............................... 111 HOLD function ............................... 138 Important safety notes .................. 133 Maintenance .................................. 134 Parking brake ................................ 130 Riding tips ...................................... 133 Warning lamp ................................. 192 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation Function/notes ................................ 61 Breakdown Towing away .................................. 251 Where will I find...? ........................ 241 see Flat tire Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 154 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 23 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Car see Vehicle Care Car wash ........................................ 234 Carpets .......................................... 240 Display ........................................... 238 Exterior lights ................................ 237 Gear or selector lever .................... 239 Interior ........................................... 238 Matte finish ................................... 236 Notes ............................................. 234 Paint .............................................. 235 Plastic trim .................................... 238 5 6 Index Power washer ................................ 235 Rear view camera .......................... 238 Roof lining ...................................... 240 Seat belt ........................................ 239 Seat cover ..................................... 239 Sensors ......................................... 237 Steering wheel ............................... 239 Trim pieces .................................... 239 Washing by hand ........................... 235 Wheels ........................................... 236 Windows ........................................ 236 Wiper blades .................................. 237 Wooden trim .................................. 239 Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes .................. 212 Installing/removing ....................... 213 Notes/how to use ......................... 212 Cargo compartment enlargement ... 211 Cargo compartment floor Height adjustment ......................... 215 Important safety notes .................. 214 Opening/closing ............................ 214 Stowage well (under) ..................... 214 Cargo net Attaching ....................................... 213 Important safety information ......... 213 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 212 CD see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 160 Center console Lower section .................................. 35 Upper section .................................. 34 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 166 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 66 Change of address .............................. 24 Change of ownership .......................... 24 Changing the bulb Cornering light function ................... 93 Charge level display .......................... 153 Charging with RANGE PLUS .......................... 164 see Charging the high-voltage battery Charging cable Connecting .................................... 124 Controls ......................................... 123 Important safety notes .................. 122 Removing ....................................... 125 Storing ........................................... 122 Warming up ................................... 118 Charging the high-voltage battery (important safety notes) ................... 117 Child Restraint system .............................. 54 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 57 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 55 On the front-passenger seat ............ 56 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 56 Top Tether ....................................... 55 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 57 Rear doors ....................................... 58 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 53 Cigarette lighter ................................ 218 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 237 Climate control Automatic climate control (dualzone) ................................................ 99 Auxiliary climate control (onboard computer) ............................ 164 Controlling automatically ............... 101 Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ................. 104 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 100 Defrosting the windows ................. 103 Defrosting the windshield .............. 102 General notes .................................. 99 Immediate pre-entry climate control ................................................. 105 Indicator lamp ................................ 101 Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 100 Maximum cooling .......................... 103 Overview of systems ........................ 99 Pre-entry climate control at departure time ............................... 105 Index Pre-entry climate control at time of departure (on-board computer) .. 164 Pre-entry climate control via key ... 105 Pre-entry climate control via key (on-board computer) ...................... 164 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 103 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 101 Refrigerant ..................................... 285 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 286 Setting the air distribution ............. 102 Setting the air vents ...................... 106 Setting the airflow ......................... 102 Setting the temperature ................ 101 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 104 Switching on/off ........................... 100 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 103 Switching the ZONE function on/off ............................................ 102 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 31 COMAND Generated electricity ..................... 120 Switching on/off ........................... 202 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 238 Combination switch ............................ 88 Compass Calibrating ..................................... 229 Calling up ....................................... 228 Magnetic field zone maps .............. 229 Setting ........................................... 229 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 156 Controller ........................................... 202 Convenience closing feature .............. 77 Convenience opening feature ............ 76 Convenience opening/closing (airrecirculation mode) ........................... 104 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 232 Filling capacity ............................... 285 Important safety notes .................. 284 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 Cornering light function Changing the bulb ............................ 93 Display message ............................ 178 Function/notes ................................ 89 Cruise control Activation conditions ..................... 137 Cruise control lever ....................... 136 Deactivating ................................... 137 Display message ............................ 184 Driving system ............................... 136 Function/notes ............................. 136 Important safety notes .................. 136 Setting a speed .............................. 137 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 137 Cup holder Center console .............................. 216 Important safety notes .................. 216 Rear compartment ......................... 217 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 27 Customer Relations Department ....... 27 D Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 180 Function/notes ................................ 87 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 166 Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Departure time Setting (on-board computer) .......... 163 Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 21 Introduction ..................................... 21 Digital speedometer ......................... 158 DIRECT SELECT lever Transmission ................................. 112 7 8 Index Display High-voltage battery charge level (instrument cluster) ....................... 153 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 233 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 167 Drive system .................................. 181 Driving systems ............................. 182 General notes ................................ 167 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 167 Lights ............................................. 178 Safety systems .............................. 168 SmartKey ....................................... 189 Tires ............................................... 185 Vehicle ........................................... 186 Displaying electrical consumption (on-board computer) ......................... 158 Displaying energy consumption (on-board computer) ......................... 158 Distance recorder ............................. 156 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 199 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 60 Warning lamp ................................. 199 Doors Automatic locking (on-board computer) ............................................. 166 Automatic locking (switch) ............... 73 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 66 Control panel ................................... 36 Display message ............................ 187 Emergency locking ........................... 73 Emergency unlocking ....................... 73 Important safety notes .................... 72 Opening (from inside) ...................... 72 Drinking and driving ......................... 132 Drive system Jump-starting ................................. 249 Starting with the SmartKey ............ 111 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 110 Switching off .................................. 129 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 234 Driving on flooded roads .................. 135 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 60 Braking assistance appropriate to the situation ..................................... 61 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59 Distance warning function ............... 60 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 63 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 62 Important safety information ........... 58 Overview .......................................... 58 STEER CONTROL ............................. 64 Driving system Parking assist PARKTRONIC .......... 139 Parking Pilot .................................. 142 Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 148 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 150 Cruise control ................................ 136 Display message ............................ 182 HOLD function ............................... 138 Rear view camera .......................... 145 Driving tips Brakes ........................................... 133 Break-in period .............................. 108 Checking brake lining thickness .... 134 Downhill gradient ........................... 133 Drinking and driving ....................... 132 Driving in winter ............................. 135 Driving on flooded roads ................ 135 Driving on wet roads ...................... 135 Energy ........................................... 132 General .......................................... 131 Hydroplaning ................................. 135 Icy road surfaces ........................... 135 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... 134 Snow chains .................................. 259 Wet road surface ........................... 134 DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 160 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Index E E‑CELL display ................................... 152 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 170 Function/notes ................................ 63 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 132 On-board computer ....................... 156 Electric motor number ...................... 283 Electrical energy generated (COMAND) .......................................... 120 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 52 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 73 Vehicle ............................................. 73 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 50 Emergency unlocking Tailgate ............................................ 75 Energy Driving tips .................................... 132 Energy flow display ........................... 157 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 162 Characteristics ................................. 63 Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 63 Display message ............................ 168 Function/notes ................................ 62 General notes .................................. 62 Important safety information ........... 62 Warning lamp ................................. 195 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 62 Exhaustive discharging (high-voltage battery) ....................................... 248 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... 237 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ......................................... 84 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 84 Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 84 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 86 Storing the parking position ............. 85 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 208 F Favorites Overview ........................................ 203 Flat tire MOExtended tires .......................... 242 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 241 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 243 Floormats ........................................... 229 Folding table ...................................... 209 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 281 Two-way radio ................................ 281 Front-passenger seat Folding the backrest forward/ back ............................................... 210 Fuel Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 256 Before changing ............................. 255 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 255 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 256 Important safety notes .................. 254 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Opening/closing the garage door .. Problems when programming ........ Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 228 226 226 228 228 226 227 9 10 Index Generated electrical energy (Audio 20) ...................................................... 120 Genuine parts ...................................... 22 Glove box ........................................... 208 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps Display message ............................ 188 Switching on/off .............................. 89 Head restraints Adjusting ......................................... 80 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 81 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 81 Headlamps Fogging up ....................................... 89 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................... 88 High-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 179 Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 88 High-voltage battery Battery care ................................... 119 Charging (charging station) ............ 125 Charging (mains socket) ................ 122 Charging cable warming ................ 118 Cruise range .................................. 120 Discharged battery ........................ 119 Display message ............................ 181 Displaying energy consumption (on-board computer) ...................... 158 Displaying the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 158 Energy consumption ...................... 120 General notes ................................ 118 Method of operation ...................... 119 Outside temperatures .................... 119 Overvoltage protection .................. 118 Problems with the charging process ................................................. 126 Reserve, warning lamp ................... 199 Terms of use .................................. 119 High-voltage disconnect device ......... 26 Hill start assist .................................. 111 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 138 Deactivating ................................... 138 Display message ............................ 182 Function/notes ............................. 138 Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Hood Closing ........................................... 232 Display message ............................ 187 Important safety notes .................. 231 Opening ......................................... 231 Horn ...................................................... 31 Hydroplaning ..................................... 135 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 64 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 32 Power display ................................ 153 Settings ......................................... 165 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 152 Interior lighting Control ............................................. 90 Overview .......................................... 89 Reading lamp ................................... 89 Internet connection Via mobile service module ............. 128 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Index J Jack Storage location ............................ 241 Using ............................................. 277 K Key positions Start/Stop button .......................... 109 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 77 Deactivation ..................................... 66 Locking ............................................ 66 Unlocking ......................................... 66 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 114 Knee bag .............................................. 44 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 55 License plate lamp Changing bulbs ................................ 94 License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 179 Light function, active Display message ............................ 180 Light sensor (display message) ....... 180 Lights Automatic headlamp mode .............. 87 Cornering light function ................... 89 Fogged up headlamps ...................... 89 Hazard warning lamps ..................... 89 High beam flasher ............................ 88 High-beam headlamps ..................... 88 Light switch ..................................... 87 Low-beam headlamps ...................... 87 Parking lamps .................................. 88 Rear fog lamp .................................. 88 Setting exterior lighting ................... 87 Standing lamps ................................ 88 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 166 Turn signals ..................................... 88 Loading guidelines ............................ 207 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 73 Emergency locking ........................... 73 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 72 Locking centrally see Central locking Locking verification signal (onboard computer) ............................... 166 Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 178 Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 87 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 81 M M+S tires ............................................ Malfunction message see Display messages Map (navigation) Switching the range on the map on/off ............................................ Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Maximum charge current Setting (charging cable) ................. mbrace Call priority .................................... Display message ............................ Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... Downloading routes ....................... Emergency call .............................. General notes ................................ Geo fencing ................................... Locating a stolen vehicle ............... MB info call button ........................ Remote fault diagnosis .................. Remote vehicle locking .................. Roadside assistance button ........... Search & Send ............................... Self-test ......................................... 259 121 236 123 222 173 222 225 220 219 225 224 221 224 224 221 223 219 11 12 Index Speed alert .................................... 225 System .......................................... 219 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 226 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 223 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 68 Inserting .......................................... 68 Locking vehicle ................................ 73 Removing ......................................... 68 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 73 Memory card (audio) ......................... 160 Memory function ................................. 85 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 167 Messages see Display messages Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 237 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 204 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 206 Frequencies ................................... 281 Installation ..................................... 281 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 160 Transmission output (maximum) .... 281 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 67 MOExtended tires .............................. 242 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 279 Mounting a new wheel ................... 278 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 276 Raising the vehicle ......................... 277 Removing a wheel .......................... 278 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 276 MP3 Operation ....................................... 160 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 155 Permanent display ......................... 165 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 154 Overview .......................................... 33 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 N Navigation Entering a destination .................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 203 158 201 108 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... 46 Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 46 System self-test ............................... 48 Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... 43 Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 52 Children in the vehicle ..................... 52 Important safety notes .................... 38 Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. 38 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 39 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 58 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 39 Seat belt .......................................... 40 OCS Conditions ....................................... 46 Faults ............................................... 49 Operation ......................................... 46 System self-test ............................... 48 Odometer ........................................... 156 Index On-board computer Assistance graphic menu ............... 162 Assistance menu ........................... 162 Audio menu ................................... 160 Display messages .......................... 167 Displaying a service message ........ 233 E‑CELL menu ................................. 163 Factory settings ............................. 166 Important safety notes .................. 152 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 165 Lighting submenu .......................... 166 Menu overview .............................. 156 Message memory .......................... 167 Navigation menu ............................ 158 Operation ....................................... 154 Service menu ................................. 163 Settings menu ............................... 163 Standard display ............................ 156 Telephone menu ............................ 160 Trip menu ...................................... 156 Vehicle submenu ........................... 166 Video DVD operation ..................... 160 Online access .................................... 127 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................... 24 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 21 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Outside temperature display ........... 152 Overhead control panel ...................... 37 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 58 P Paint code number ............................ 282 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 235 Panic alarm .......................................... 38 Parking Important safety notes .................. 128 Parking brake ................................ 130 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side .................................................. 85 Rear view camera .......................... 145 Parking aid see Exterior mirrors see Rear view camera Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 141 Driving system ............................... 139 Function/notes ............................. 139 Important safety notes .................. 139 Problems (malfunctions) ................ 141 Sensor range ................................. 139 Warning display ............................. 140 Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 130 Applying or releasing manually ...... 130 Display message ............................ 171 Electric parking brake .................... 130 Emergency braking ........................ 131 General notes ................................ 130 Releasing automatically ................. 131 Warning lamp ................................. 198 Parking lamps Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Parking Pilot Canceling ....................................... 145 Detecting parking spaces .............. 142 Display Message ............................ 183 Exiting a parking space .................. 144 Function/notes ............................. 142 Important safety notes .................. 142 Parking .......................................... 143 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 176 Indicator lamps ................................ 39 Problem (malfunction) ................... 176 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 58 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 238 Power display .................................... 153 Power washers .................................. 235 Power windows see Side windows Program selector button .................. 114 13 14 Index Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65 Immobilizer ...................................... 64 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 22 Pulling away General notes ................................ 111 Hill start assist ............................... 111 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27 R Radio Selecting a station ......................... 160 see separate operating instructions Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Range RANGE PLUS ................................. 120 RANGE PLUS charge ........................................... 164 Range ............................................ 120 Reading lamp ....................................... 89 READY indicator ................................ 152 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 106 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 179 Replacing bulbs ............................... 93 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seats Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 211 Rear view camera "Reverse parking" function ............ 147 Cleaning instructions ..................... 238 Display in the multimedia system .. 146 Function/notes ............................. 145 General notes ................................ 145 Switching on/off ........................... 146 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 103 Switching on/off ........................... 103 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade ................ 97 Switching on/off .............................. 95 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 83 Dipping (automatic) ......................... 84 Recharging statistics (COMAND) Generated electricity ..................... 120 Recuperative Brake System Driving safety systems ..................... 64 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 285 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 226 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 226 Replacing bulbs Backup lamp .................................... 93 High-beam headlamps ..................... 92 Important safety notes .................... 90 Installing/removing the cover (front wheel arch) ............................ 92 License plate lamp ........................... 94 Low-beam headlamps ...................... 92 Overview of bulb types .................... 91 Parking lamps .................................. 92 Rear fog lamp .................................. 93 Standing lamps ................................ 92 Turn signals (front) ........................... 93 Reporting safety defects .................... 27 Rescue card ......................................... 28 Reserve High-voltage battery ...................... 199 Restraint system Display message ............................ 175 Introduction ..................................... 38 Warning lamp ................................. 198 Warning lamp (function) ................... 39 Index Reverse gear Engaging ........................................ 112 Reversing feature Side windows ................................... 75 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24 Roof carrier ........................................ 215 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 240 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 286 Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 52 see Occupant safety Safety notes High voltage ..................................... 25 High-voltage electrical system ......... 25 Safety system see Driving safety systems SD card Inserting ........................................ 206 Inserting/removing ........................ 206 Removing ....................................... 206 SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Seat belts Adjusting the height ......................... 42 center rear-compartment seat ......... 42 Cleaning ......................................... 239 Correct usage .................................. 41 Fastening ......................................... 42 Important safety guidelines ............. 40 Introduction ..................................... 40 Releasing ......................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 190 Warning lamp (function) ................... 42 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 80 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support .................................................. 81 Adjusting the head restraint ............ 80 Cleaning the cover ......................... 239 Correct driver's seat position ........... 79 Folding the backrest (rear compartment) forwards/back .............. 211 Important safety notes .................... 79 Seat heating problem ...................... 82 Storing settings (memory function) ................................................. 86 Switching seat heating on/off ......... 82 Securing cargo .................................. 212 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 239 see DIRECT SELECT lever Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 237 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 163 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 284 Coolant (engine) ............................ 284 Important safety notes .................. 283 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 285 Washer fluid ................................... 285 Setting the air distribution ............... 102 Setting the airflow ............................ 102 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Setting the maximum charge current (Control system) ........................ 165 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 166 On-board computer ....................... 163 Side impact air bag ............................. 45 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 179 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 236 15 16 Index Convenience closing feature ............ 77 Convenience opening feature .......... 76 Important safety information ........... 75 Opening/closing .............................. 76 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78 Resetting ......................................... 77 Reversing feature ............................. 75 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 69 Changing the programming ............. 67 Checking the battery ....................... 69 Convenience closing feature ............ 77 Convenience opening feature .......... 76 Display message ............................ 189 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 66 Important safety notes .................... 66 Loss ................................................. 70 Mechanical key ................................ 68 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 109 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70 SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 109 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Snow chains ...................................... 259 Sockets Center console .............................. 218 General notes ................................ 218 Luggage compartment ................... 219 Rear compartment ......................... 219 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 202 Special seat belt retractor .................. 53 Specialist workshop ............................ 27 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 165 Digital ............................................ 158 In the Instrument cluster ................. 32 Selecting the display unit ............... 165 Standing lamps Display message ............................ 179 Replacing bulbs ............................... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Start/Stop button Removing ....................................... 110 Starting the drive system ............... 110 Starting (vehicle) ............................... 110 STEER CONTROL .................................. 64 Steering Display message ............................ 188 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ........................ 83 Button overview ............................... 33 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 154 Cleaning ......................................... 239 Important safety notes .................... 83 Paddle shifters ............................... 115 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 115 Stowage compartments Armrest (front) ............................... 208 Armrest (under) ............................. 209 Center console .............................. 208 Center console (rear) ..................... 209 Cup holders ................................... 216 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 208 Glove box ....................................... 208 Important safety information ......... 207 Map pockets .................................. 210 Stowage net ................................... 210 Under driver's seat/frontpassenger seat .............................. 209 Stowage net ....................................... 210 Summer tires ..................................... 259 Sun visor ............................................ 217 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 104 Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 206 T Tail lamps see Lights Tailgate Display message ............................ 187 Emergency unlocking ....................... 75 Important safety notes .................... 74 Index Opening dimensions ...................... 286 Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 74 Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 32 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 283 Information .................................... 281 Tires/wheels ................................. 279 Vehicle data ................................... 286 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 161 Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 205 Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 204 Display message ............................ 188 Introduction ................................... 160 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 160 Number from the phone book ........ 161 Redialing ........................................ 161 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 161 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Switching between mobile phones ........................................... 206 Temperature Outside temperature ...................... 152 Setting (climate control) ................ 101 Through-loading feature ................... 210 Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 263 Checking manually ........................ 263 Display message ............................ 185 Maximum ....................................... 263 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 244 Notes ............................................. 262 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 245 Recommended ............................... 260 Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ 265 Function/notes ............................. 263 General notes ................................ 263 Important safety notes .................. 264 Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 266 Restarting ...................................... 265 Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Important safety notes .................. Storage location ............................ Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... General notes ................................ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... M+S tires ....................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. 200 265 243 243 241 244 245 275 273 273 275 273 257 274 273 276 185 275 273 273 274 279 274 274 257 274 257 274 270 275 272 274 259 274 274 274 17 18 Index Maximum tire load ......................... 272 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 274 MOExtended tires .......................... 259 Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ 275 PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... 275 Replacing ....................................... 275 Service life ..................................... 258 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 275 Speed rating (definition) ................ 274 Storing ........................................... 276 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 273 Summer tires ................................. 259 Temperature .................................. 270 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 275 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 275 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 275 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 274 Tire size (data) ............................... 279 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 270 Tire tread ....................................... 258 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 275 Total load limit (definition) ............. 275 Traction ......................................... 269 Traction (definition) ....................... 275 Tread wear ..................................... 269 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 269 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 274 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 275 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 274 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 55 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 251 Installing the towing eye ................ 253 Removing the towing eye ............... 253 Transporting the vehicle ................ 254 With both axles on the ground ....... 253 With front axle raised ..................... 253 With the rear axle raised ................ 254 Towing eye ......................................... 241 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Trailer hitch ......................................... 26 Trailer tow hitch .................................. 26 Transmission DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 112 Drive program ................................ 114 Driving tips .................................... 114 Engaging the drive position ............ 113 Engaging the park position ............ 112 Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients .............................. 114 Kickdown ....................................... 114 Overview ........................................ 111 Program selector button ................ 114 Shifting to neutral .......................... 113 Transmission position display ......... 112 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 112 Transmission positions .................... 113 Transporting the vehicle .................. 254 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 239 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 156 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 156 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 158 Trunk lid see Tailgate Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 286 Turn signals Display message ............................ 178 Replacing bulbs (front) ..................... 93 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 281 Installation ..................................... 281 Transmission output (maximum) .... 281 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 73 Index From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 72 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 206 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 217 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 186 Equipment ....................................... 23 Individual settings .......................... 163 Limited Warranty ............................. 28 Loading .......................................... 266 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 73 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 66 Lowering ........................................ 279 Maintenance .................................... 24 Parking for a long period ................ 131 Raising ........................................... 277 Reporting problems ......................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 276 Starting .......................................... 110 Transporting .................................. 254 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 73 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 66 Vehicle data ................................... 286 Vehicle data Roof load (maximum) ..................... 286 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 286 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 286 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 73 Vehicle Homepage Data protection .............................. 127 Functions ....................................... 128 General information ....................... 127 Internet connection ....................... 128 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 282 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 241 Ventilation Setting the vents ........................... 106 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 160 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 VIN Seat ............................................... 283 Type plate ...................................... 282 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 193 Active Brake Assist ........................ 199 Brakes ........................................... 192 Distance warning ........................... 199 ESP® .............................................. 195 ESP® OFF ....................................... 196 Overview .......................................... 32 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 39 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ............................................... 192 Restraint system ............................ 198 Seat belt ........................................ 190 Tire pressure monitor .................... 200 Warranty .............................................. 23 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 188 Weather display (COMAND) see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 201 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 279 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 279 Wheel chock ...................................... 276 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 275 Checking ........................................ 257 Cleaning ......................................... 236 Important safety notes .................. 257 Information on driving .................... 257 Interchanging/changing ................ 275 Mounting a new wheel ................... 278 Removing a wheel .......................... 278 Storing ........................................... 276 Tightening torque ........................... 279 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 279 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 175 Operation ......................................... 45 19 20 Index Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 102 Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 232 Important safety notes .................. 285 Windshield wipers Display message ............................ 188 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98 Rear window wiper .......................... 95 Replacing the wiper blades .............. 96 Switching on/off .............................. 95 Winter driving Slippery road surfaces ................... 135 Snow chains .................................. 259 Winter operation General notes ................................ 259 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 259 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 237 Important safety notes .................... 96 Replacing (rear window) .................. 97 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 239 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Z ZONE function Switching on/off ........................... 102 Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 202). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select % symbol ?. X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X 21 22 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction Protecting the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. Energy consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Robserve the correct tire pressure. carrying unnecessary weight. Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rall maintenance work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ravoid Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Rmonitor the vehicle's energy consumption. Ravoid H Environmental note Have a defective high-voltage battery disposed of in an environmentally-responsible manner. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or reuse them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 282). Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial Z 23 Introduction Service and vehicle operation Introduction 24 Operating safety defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you when taking the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service advisor will enter every service into your Maintenance Booklet on your behalf. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100(Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA If you drive your vehicle abroad, please note that service facilities or replacement parts may not be immediately available. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information, or write to the following address: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Operating safety Important safety notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You Operating safety Introduction should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bumps or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe Danger of electric shock G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. 25 All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system components are marked with yellow warning stickers which warn you about high voltages. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange. When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sure to observe the following sections: RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 254) RTowing the vehicle with the front axle raised (Y page 253) RTowing a vehicle with both axles on the ground (Y page 253) Read the important safety instructions on towing away (Y page 251). The ignition must be switched off when carrying out general tasks, such as changing bulbs or checking the coolant level. Automatic switching off of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system If the restraint systems are activated during an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is automatically deactivated. This is to ensure that you do not come into contact with high voltage. Automatic protection from switching on of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is not activated when the vehicle is started if: Ra serious electrical insulation malfunction is detected in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system is disconnected Z 26 Operating safety Introduction Automatic switching off of the charging process The charging process is deactivated automatically if: Rthe high-voltage battery is fully charged The charging process is interrupted automatically if: Ra serious electrical insulation malfunction is detected in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system is disconnected High-voltage switch-off device ! The high-voltage system must only be switched off at vehicle standstill by specially trained service engineers. Otherwise the high-voltage system may be damaged. Your vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage switch-off device : which can be used to switch off the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Mobile phone antenna ! It is not permitted to retrofit a mobile phone antenna. Trailer tow hitch ! Retrofitting a trailer tow hitch is not permissible. Warning Vehicles with an electric motor generate much less driving noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, or it may not be heard at all. This is particularly the case if other road users have not yet seen your vehicle but are instead relying on hearing. Drive with particular care, allowing for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably. The vehicle is equipped with a sound generator. The sound generator is activated so that other road users can hear your vehicle better. The sound generator is activated at speeds of under 20 mph (30 km/h) and switches off automatically at higher speeds. Declarations of conformity USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Operating safety ! If equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Rwork on the drive system Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. Z Introduction G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. 27 Introduction 28 Data stored in the vehicle You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR codes for the rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data stored in the vehicle Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connection with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and RHow fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RDTS™ Z 29 Introduction Information on copyright 30 Information on copyright RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks Introduction of Apple Inc. RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries. and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. RMicrosoft® Cockpit 31 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters ; Combination switch 88 = Instrument cluster 32 ? Horn A DIRECT SELECT lever 112 B Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display C Overhead control panel Function Page D Climate control systems E Ignition lock F Adjusts the steering wheel G Cruise control lever 136 H Electric parking brake 130 I Light switch 87 140 J Diagnostics connection 26 37 K Opens the hood 115 99 109 83 231 32 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Function : Speedometer with segments Warning and indicator lamps: L Low-beam headlamps T Parking lamps K High-beam headlamps ÷ ESP® F Electric parking brake applied (red) ! Electric parking brake (yellow) · Distance warning J Brakes (yellow) å ESP® OFF ! ABS malfunctioning $ Brakes (red) ; #! Turn signals = Multifunction display with outside temperature display Page Function ? Power display Warning and indicator lamps: 6 Restraint system ü Seat belt not fastened é RBS (Recuperative Brake System) R Rear fog lamp ; Drive system h Tire pressure monitor 153 A E-CELL display 152 B Display for the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery Ý High-voltage battery reserve 153 87 88 88 195 198 198 199 192 195 193 192 88 155 152 Page 198 190 192 88 181 200 181 Multifunction steering wheel 33 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions W X Adjusts volume 8 Mute ? Switches on voiceoperated control of the navigation system or the Voice Control System Page 155 160 i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron voice-operated control of the navigation system in the manufacturer's operating instructions Function ? ò Opens the menu list 9 : Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operates the on-board computer ? Switches off voiceoperated control of the navigation system or the Voice Control System i In vehicles with multimedia system Page 154 COMAND you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions 34 Center console Center console At a glance Center console, upper section Function : Page Multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions) ; c Seat heating = c Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 141 ? Activates RANGE PLUS 120 82 Function Page A £ Hazard warning lamps 89 B PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp 39 C Selects the drive program 114 D & Pre-entry climate control 105 Center console 35 At a glance Center console, lower section Function : Page Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Stowage compartment 217 218 218 207 ; Stowage compartment 207 = Cup holder 216 Function ? Stowage compartment with Media Interface A Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions) Page 207 36 Door control panel At a glance Door control panel Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 72 B ; % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle W Opens/closes the side windows 76 72 C = r45= Saves the seat and exterior mirror settings 85 n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the side windows in the rear compartment 58 ? Adjusts the seats electrically 80 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 84 Overhead control panel 37 At a glance Overhead control panel Function : Page u Switches the rear compartment interior lighting on/off 89 ; p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 89 = | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off 89 ? ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) A Rear-view mirror 84 B Sets the compass 228 Function Page C Buttons for the garage door opener 226 D F Roadside assistance call button (mbrace system) 221 E G SOS button (mbrace system) 220 F Eyeglasses compartment 208 G c Switches the front interior lighting on 89 H p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 89 221 Occupant safety 38 Safety Panic alarm To activate: press and hold the ! button : for approx. one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: Rseat belt system Rair bags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 41) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 79). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 79). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 43). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 50). For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Occupant safety The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the drive system is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the drive system running Rlights up again while the drive system is running G DANGER If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may be electrocuted if you touch the damaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. After an accident, switch off the ignition immediately and remove the key from the ignition lock. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Safety Restraint system warning lamp 39 PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enaZ 40 Occupant safety bled or deactivated (Y page 45). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 40) and "Air bags" (Y page 43). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Safety Seat belts Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extracted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not correct an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occupants during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an additional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction Occupant safety If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 45) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified. Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions. Z Safety abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems. 41 Occupant safety 42 Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 207). Safety Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). If the center rear seat belt is being used, also observe the information about the seat belt for the center rear seat (Y page 42). Seat belt for the center rear seat If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear center seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear center seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Basic illustration X Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide belt outlet downwards. X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 53). The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the drive system is started. If the front doors are closed and the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the drive system is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with Adjust the seat (Y page 79). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue ; in belt buckle :. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 50). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 39). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Z 43 Safety Occupant safety 44 Occupant safety accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Safety Rno G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 39). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 45). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 46) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity Driver's knee bag Front air bags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced. Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is triggered together with the front air bag. The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. Occupant safety G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. It also offers additional pelvis protection for occupants in the front seats. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Window curtain air bags Safety Side impact air bags 45 Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 50). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Z 46 Occupant safety Safety Requirements To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Operation of Occupant Classification System (OCS) : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 176). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 49). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. Rthe Z 47 Safety Occupant safety Safety 48 Occupant safety If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52). When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forward- facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 46). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 49). Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 48). Z 49 Safety Occupant safety 50 Occupant safety Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 46). passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used. son of a stature correX Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Runoccupied adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied with the weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 39) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags and driver's knee bag RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 39). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deciZ 51 Safety Occupant safety Safety 52 Children in the vehicle sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact, the relevant restraint system components are deployed independently of each other. RSide impact air bags on the side where the impact takes place, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection in this situation i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: RFrontal collision RSide impact Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rthe drive system and the high-voltage electrical system are switched off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 45) G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Children in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the transmission out of park position P Rstart the vehicle's drive system. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 41). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat. Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. Installing a child restraint system: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated. X Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back towards the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Z Safety Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: 53 54 Children in the vehicle Safety Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces If you install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the center rear seat, the rear arm rest must be folded back as far as possible. You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 207). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45). There you will also find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Children in the vehicle G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. If the rear backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible (Y page 211). X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint Z Safety LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system 55 56 Children in the vehicle Safety Top Tether anchorages Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Tension Top Tether belt B. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 81). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt B. X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes The Top Tether anchorages are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests. X Move head restraint : upwards. X Release rear seat backrest = and fold it forwards (Y page 211). X Route Top Tether belt B under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt B into Top Tether anchorage ?. Make sure that: RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ? as shown. RTop Tether belt B is not twisted. RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest = and cargo compartment cover ; if cargo compartment cover ; is installed. RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest = and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed. X Swing back rear seat backrest = until it engages. The red lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 45). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 39) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Children in the vehicle If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease Rshift P. the parking brake. the transmission out of park position Rstart the vehicle's drive system. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: rear doors (Y page 58) Rthe rear side windows (Y page 58) Rthe Z Safety Forward-facing child restraint system 57 Driving safety systems 58 Child-proof locks for the rear doors Pets in the vehicle Safety G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows X To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 59) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 59) RActive Brake Assist (Y page 60) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 62) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 63) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 64) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) play messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 168). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X BAS (Brake Assist System) General information General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 58). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 58). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 193) and disZ Safety vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 257). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. 59 60 Driving safety systems Active Brake Assist General information Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 58). Active Brake Assist consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and braking assistance appropriate to the situation. Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with the vehicle traveling in front or reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist supports you with braking assistance appropriate to the situation. Important safety notes Detection of hazardous situations can be particularly impaired by: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after servicing is carried out on the Active Brake Assist system Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 108). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where no visible damage to the front of the vehicle is apparent. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist is active after every ignition cycle. You can activate or deactivate Active Brake Assist (Y page 162) in the on-board computer. When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphic display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 58). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Driving safety systems Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, Active Brake Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene. Braking assistance appropriate to the situation General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 58). With the help of the radar sensor system, Adaptive Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If Adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the brake pressure necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, the braking assistance adapts to the situation and automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree appropriate to the traffic situation. Braking assistance appropriate to the situation provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Situation-dependent braking assistance is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been recognized as such at least once over the period of observation, up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h). Braking assistance appropriate to the situation can also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle speeds of around 44 mph 70 km/h. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Braking assistance appropriate to the situation is then deactivated. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 58). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Z Safety Function 61 62 Driving safety systems Safety Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 58). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might: Important safety notes Rintervene i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot Due to the nature of the system, complex but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Active Brake Assist to intervene. Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 58). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. tion (Y page 58). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When towing your vehicle with the front axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 253). When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 254). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 195) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 168). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Driving safety systems General information If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X Deactivating/activating ESP® Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 58). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 162). ESP®deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP®activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RSTEER CONTROL is no longer active RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 58). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have Z Safety Characteristics of ESP® 63 64 Protection against theft the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Safety Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 193) as well as display messages (Y page 170). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 138) and hill start assist (Y page 111). STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle begins to skid Important safety notes Rthe braking performance of the electric motor may be either reduced or not effective Rbrake pedal resistance may be lower than usual Rpedal travel may be longer than usual If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of this malfunction, continue to depress the brake pedal. The brake system is still fully functional. Observe the important safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 58). The Recuperative Brake System converts the kinetic energy when braking into electrical energy. The electric motor is used as an alternator during braking. This electrical energy is then stored in the high-voltage battery. You can find information about manually adjustable recuperation under "Steering wheel paddle shifters" (Y page 115). If the warning light in the instrument cluster is lit up, there is a motor malfunction or a brake malfunction. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 192) as well as display messages (Y page 168). i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 58). No steering assistance is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning Rthe steering is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Recuperative Brake System G WARNING In the event of malfunctions in the Recuperative Brake System, the following may occur: Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the drive system if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the drive system. Protection against theft ATA (anti-theft alarm system) X or To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X i If the alarm continues for more than To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe tailgate Rthe hood X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is stopped. or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped. Z Safety In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. The READY display in the multifunction display does not appear. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). 65 66 SmartKey SmartKey SmartKey functions Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Opening and closing Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the transmission out of park position P Rstart the vehicle's drive system. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case : & To lock the vehicle ; % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Ranti-theft protection is reactivated. X To lock: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe charge socket flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control (see the separate operating instructions). You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 166). KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the drive system can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. SmartKey 67 You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the drive system Rwhile driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 77). X X To unlock the tailgate: pull tailgate handle :. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 69). X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the charge socket flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for Z Opening and closing Locking and unlocking SmartKey 68 approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 69). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Opening and closing Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 69). Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the antitheft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 65). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X To deactivate the alarm with the key: press the % or & button on the key. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. or Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the charge socket flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the charge socket flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Removing the mechanical key Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 73) RUnlocking the cargo compartment (Y page 75) RLocking the vehicle (Y page 73) X Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. SmartKey battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. SmartKey X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 68). The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Checking the battery Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 69). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover : opens. When doing so, do not hold cover : shut. X Remove battery tray cover :. X X Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover : and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 68). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Z Opening and closing Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. 69 70 SmartKey Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: try again to lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary (Y page 69). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. Opening and closing X There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: try again to lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 69). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X SmartKey Problem 71 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The drive system cannot The on-board voltage is too low. be started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the drive system again. If this does not work: X Check the 12 V battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 248). or X Check the high-voltage battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 118). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 249). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The drive system cannot The vehicle is locked. be started using the X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. Start/Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehi- The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. cle. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if necessary (Y page 69). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. You have lost the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Z Opening and closing X 72 Doors Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Opening and closing Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knob :. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;. X the parking brake. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 58). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 65). Rshift the transmission out of park position P Rstart the vehicle's drive system. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for example. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). Unlocking and opening doors from the inside To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If all the doors and the tailgate are closed, the vehicle locks. This does not lock or unlock the charge socket flap. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can open the rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they are secured by the child-proof lock (Y page 58). If the vehicle has previously been locked with the SmartKey from the outside, opening a door X X Doors Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 65). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 68). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Automatic locking feature Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The door is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 68). X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (Y page 166). X Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the tailgate. X Press the locking button on the driver’s door (Y page 72). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. Z Opening and closing from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 65). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. 73 Cargo compartment 74 Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 68). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. Opening and closing X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 68). X The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 286). You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. The tailgate can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Rreleased with the emergency release from the inside Opening/closing from outside Opening i If you lock the vehicle as described above, the socket flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed. Cargo compartment Important safety notes G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Press the % button on the SmartKey. Pull handle :. X Raise the tailgate. X X Closing Side windows X Tailgate emergency release General notes ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 286). If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey, or Rusing the remote operating switch in the door control panel: Use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. You can reach the emergency release via the cargo compartment. Opening Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Side window reversing feature Remove cargo compartment cover (Y page 213). X Fold the rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 211). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 68). X Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in the trim and push it in. X Open the tailgate. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 68). X The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. Z Opening and closing Pull the tailgate down using handle :. Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. X 75 Side windows 76 G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Opening and closing Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again. i If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling the switch again. X i You can continue to operate the side win- dows after switching off the drive system or removing the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. i When the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 58), the side windows cannot be operated from the rear. Convenience opening Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the Exclusive package: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. X Vehicles with the Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-GO: for the following operations, point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows reach the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Side windows 77 Convenience closing feature G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the Exclusive package: when you lock the vehicle, you can close the side windows at the same time. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the side windows (Y page 75). Using the SmartKey Vehicles with the Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-GO: for the following operations, point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey must be in close proximity to the vehicle. X Press and hold the & button until the side windows are fully closed. Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X X Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 76). X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 76). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Z Opening and closing Important safety notes 78 Side windows Problems with the side windows G WARNING Opening and closing If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Seats G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle's drive system. Ryou should have a good overview of traffic conditions Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area Further related subjects: RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 80) RAdjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 83) RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 42) RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (Y page 84) RVehicles with a memory function: saving the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 85) Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 52). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Correct driver's seat position 79 80 Seats motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle's drive system. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i Further related subjects: Rcargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear seats) (Y page 211) Adjusting the seats electrically G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. : ; = ? Seat height Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Backrest angle i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 85). Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle's drive system. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- Seats Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. Adjusting the head restraints manually Adjusting the head restraint height To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. There are several notches. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head restraint backwards. X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height X Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. X Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. 81 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 82 Seats : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumswitched off prematurely ers are switched on. or cannot be switched X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the on. rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. Mirrors 83 Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle's drive system. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. : Release lever ; Adjusts the steering wheel height = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. Mirrors Rear-view mirror X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust Mirrors 84 Exterior mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the vehicle's drive system. mirror using button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press button = up, down, or to the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated at low outside temperatures. Heating takes a maximum of ten minutes. i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster. G WARNING Exterior mirror pushed out of position The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button ;. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press button :. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior X off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. Memory function change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with the "Mirrors package". The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the default parking position. X Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the front-passenger side exterior mirror returns to the driving position. X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mirror using the corresponding button (Y page 84). X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rwhen you use button : to select the exterior mirror on the driver's side X Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror = Button for the exterior mirror setting ? Memory button M Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press button ;. X If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors RImmediately 85 86 Memory function While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rseat and backrest position Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Adjust the seat (Y page 80). Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side (Y page 84). X Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant preset position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: switch Rcombination switch (Y page 88) Ron-board computer (Y page 166) Rlight Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock Automatic headlamp mode à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on/off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the drive system running: if you have switched on the Daytime Running Lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on the automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to the à position. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 166). If the drive system is switched on and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Low-beam headlamps Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps come on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. Z Lights and windshield wipers Exterior lighting 87 Exterior lighting 88 To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the drive system. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Combination switch Lights and windshield wipers Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the drive system. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Parking lamps ! If the battery charge level is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are switched off automatically in order to preserve energy to start the drive system. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid using the parking lamps T for periods of several hours. Where possible, switch the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamp on. X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or it should be in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The high-beam headlamps only switch on in the à position if the low-beam headlamps are on. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To switch on the high-beam flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X Interior lighting Hazard warning lamps 89 direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed or Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel Cornering light function : p Switches the left-hand front reading lamp on or off ; c Switches the front interior lighting on = v Switches the rear interior lighting on or off ? | Switches the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off A p Switches the right-hand front reading The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the lamp on or off B Switches the automatic interior lighting con- trol on Z Lights and windshield wipers Rif Replacing bulbs 90 Control panel in the grab handle in the rear compartment Replacing bulbs Important safety notes Xenon bulbs: Lights and windshield wipers : To switch the reading lamp on/off Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color and brightness for the ambient lighting may be set via the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. Automatic interior lighting control To switch on: set the switch to center position B. X To switch off: set the switch to the | position. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. X G DANGER Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get an electric shock if you remove the cover of the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the drive system. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before the drive system is started. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Other bulbs: G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass Replacing bulbs Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W Lights and windshield wipers tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Besides the Xenon bulbs, there are other bulbs that you cannot replace yourself. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 91). Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Overview of bulb types You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Tail lamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : Rear fog lamp: P 21 W ; Backup lamp: W 16 W Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; High-beam headlamps: H7 55 W = Parking lamps/standing lamps: W 5 W LL ? Low-beam headlamps: H7 55 W 91 License plate lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps) : License plate lamp: C 5 W Z Replacing bulbs 92 Replacing front bulbs Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 92). X X Lights and windshield wipers High-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Slide cover : upwards. Cover : is released. X Unclip cover :. X To install:clip in cover :. X Push cover : down. Cover : is locked. Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X X Parking lamps/standing lamps (halogen headlamps) Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 92). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X X Replacing bulbs Pull out bulb holder ;. Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X X X X Turn signals (halogen headlamps) 93 Replacing rear bulbs Tail lamps Backup lamp and rear fog lamp Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and pull out. X Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Cornering light function (Xenon bulbs) Switch off the lights. Open the tailgate. X In recess ? on the inside of the closing handle, pry off and unclip ; the upper section of handle = with a flat smooth object, e.g. a screwdriver, and remove. X Pull the lower section of handle : using a sharp, sudden movement to remove it from the paneling and then place it to one side. X X Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X X Z Lights and windshield wipers Due to their location, have the bulbs in the backup lamp and the fog lamp in the tailgate replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing bulbs 94 Reach under the right-hand side of trim B and lightly tug along the entire length of the trim in order to unclip A it. X Pull out connector C of the surround lighting by releasing the latches. X Place paneling B to one side. X Backup lamp G: pull the bulb out of bulb holder E. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Rear fog lamp H: press the bulb gently into bulb holder E, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Reinsert the bulb holder until you hear it engage audibly. X X Position paneling D and engage it in place by tapping it with your hand. Before continuing with the installation, check that all the metal clips are inserted in the parts placed to one side: 2 clips ; in the upper part of handle = and 5 clips A in paneling B. X If not, remove the missing metal clips from the metal openings in the tailgate and insert them in the appropriate places. X Take paneling B and connect plug connector C to the surround lighting. i The surround lighting only illuminates when the tailgate has been shut and reopened. X Position paneling B and engage it in place by tapping it with your hand, starting from the outside. Lights and windshield wipers X X On the side where the bulb is to be replaced, unclip the remaining part of trim D from the assembly with a strong tug, until the bulb holder is accessible. Clip in the lower section of handle : at position ; again. X Insert the upper section of handle = into lower section : and engage with recess ? again. X X Remove bulb holder E using both sides of lever F. License plate lamp Switch off the lights. Open the tailgate. X Apply a screwdriver to lamp lens : from the outside. X Bulb holder X Windshield wipers X X X Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the windshield becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind- shield using washer fluid Switching the rear window wiper on/ off Combination switch : è Switch 2 ô Wipes with washer fluid 3 I Switches on intermittent wiping 4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping 5 ô Wipes with washer fluid X X Switch on the ignition. Slide switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the è symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the instrument cluster. Further information on the assistance graphic (Y page 162). Z Lights and windshield wipers Lever out lamp lens : and remove it. Replace the bulb. X Insert lamp lens : into the license plate lamp and press it in until it engages. X 95 Windshield wipers 96 Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make Lights and windshield wipers sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/ rear window. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Changing the windshield wiper blades Removing the wiper blades Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Installing the wiper blades Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Windshield wipers 97 Replacing the rear window wiper blade Removing a wiper blade Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: switch off the engine. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until you feel it engage. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;. Installing a wiper blade Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. X i The duration of the color change varies depending on the usage conditions. Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. X X Z Lights and windshield wipers X 98 Windshield wipers Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. Lights and windshield wipers The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the center of the windshield. Overview of climate control systems i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 76). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required The dual-zone automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Dual-zone automatic climate control is only operational when the vehicle is ready to drive. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows closed. Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the side paneling in the cargo compartment clear. Otherwise the vehicle will not be ventilated correctly. i The integrated filter filters out most parti- cles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that under certain circumstan- ces the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes. Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control : ; = ? A Sets the temperature, left (Y page 101) Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 101) Defrosts the windshield (Y page 102) Increases the airflow (Y page 102) Sets the air distribution (Y page 102) Climate control Overview of climate control systems 99 Climate control 100 Operating the climate control systems B C D E F G H I J Display Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 104) Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 100) Sets the temperature, right (Y page 101) Activates or deactivates maximum cooling (Y page 103) Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 100) Reduces the airflow (Y page 102) Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 103) Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 102) Optimum use of 3-zone automatic climate control Climate control system The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your dual-zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿ buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display; see separate operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions. You can choose between various drive programs with the program selector button (Y page 114). If you have selected drive program E+: Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling output is reduced when heating Rthe time for which the rear window defroster will run is reduced If you have selected drive program E or S, the current climate settings are maintained. Rheat Operating the climate control systems Activates/deactivates climate control General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Dual-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X Press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up. X i Activate climate control primarily using the à button. Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating X Press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up or goes out. The indicator lamp in the button indicates that the respective function is activated. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in the Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal¿ button flashes function. three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. Setting climate control to automatic X General notes or In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode. X Setting climate control to automatic Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated. X To switch to manual mode:press the É or Ë button. Press the K or I button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated. Setting the temperature Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. The set temperature is automatically maintained at a constant level. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To increase or decrease: turn control : or E counter-clockwise or clockwise. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Climate control not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function is operational when the vehicle is ready to drive. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. 101 Operating the climate control systems 102 Climate control Setting the air distribution Defrosting the windshield Air distribution settings General notes ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield and side windows. i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise until they engage. Setting the air distribution Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press the É or Ë button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. X Setting the airflow Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To increase or reduce:press the K or I button. X Switching the ZONE function on/off X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button lights up. The temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. X To deactivate: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. i You should only select the "Windshield defrosting" function until the windshield is clear again. Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights up. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off Vehicles with windshield heating: the windshield heating is switched on automatically using the "Windshield defrosting" function. i The "Windshield defrosting" function automatically sets the blower output to the optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the airflow may increase or decrease automatically after the ¬ button is pressed. X i You can adjust the blower output manually while the "Windshield defrosting" function is in operation: Press the ó or ô button. X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. Operating the climate control systems X Turn temperature control : or E counterclockwise or clockwise (Y page 99). MAX COOL maximum cooling The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA. The MAX COOL function only works when the vehicle is ready to drive. X To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To deactivate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Set the air distribution to P or O. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X X Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Activating/deactivating Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumidification" function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. X Problems with the rear window defroster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. X The battery has not been sufficiently charged. Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Climate control or 103 Operating the climate control systems 104 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Climate control General notes Convenience opening or closing using the air-recirculation button You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. G WARNING When using the convenience closing feature, parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area when a side window is being closed. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Activating/deactivating G WARNING Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X To activate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the e button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the e button. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. X i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 45 ‡ (7 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 45 ‡ (7 †) if the cooling with air dehumidification function is activated During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the W switch in the door to stop the movement of the side windows. To continue closing the side window, pull on the W switch. X Convenience closing feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows start to close automatically. The indicator lamp in the e button lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. If parts of the body are in the closing area during convenience closing, proceed as follows: X Press the W button to stop the side windows. The side window stops. X To then open the side window, press the W button again. or X Press and hold the e button again for at least two seconds. The side windows move in the opposite direction. X Convenience opening feature: press and hold the e button until the side windows start to open automatically. The indicator lamp in the e button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. Operating the climate control systems i If you open the side windows manually after closing them with the convenience closing feature, they will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey General notes Before getting in, the vehicle interior can be briefly warmed or ventilated in advance. In addition, the air from the air vent can be pre-cooled. The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged before the "Pre-entry climate control via key" function can be activated. Activating/deactivating When the vehicle is unlocked using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the climate control functions are activated. The pre-cooling and pre-heating climate control functions last 5 minutes. When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following functions are activated as necessary: RClimate control system RCooling with air dehumidification RBlower When the vehicle is pre-heated, the following functions are activated as necessary: RClimate control system RBlower RSeat heating RWindshield heating RRear window defroster Pre-entry climate control is automatically switched off when operational readiness mode is requested. Activating or deactivating You can activate and deactivate the pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey) function using the on-board computer in the E-CELL submenu (Y page 164). i If the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is below the specified minimum condition of charge, pre-entry climate control will not be activated even if it has been set. Pre-entry climate control at departure time and immediate pre-entry climate control Important safety notes G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. General notes Using the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function, you can cool or heat the vehicle interior prior to the desired departure time. When using the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function, the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery must be higher than the specified minimum condition of charge. The running time of the climate control may be reduced if: Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electric power supply Rthe high-voltage battery is not fully charged With active "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" the condition of charge of the highvoltage battery can be reduced, even if the charge cable connector is connected. In certain situations, the desired interior temperature cannot be reached. When the vehicle is cooled, the following functions are activated as necessary: RClimate control system RCooling with air dehumidification RBlower When the vehicle is heated, the following functions are activated as necessary: RClimate control system RBlower Z Climate control Notes on the automatic reversing feature for the side windows (Y page 75). 105 Air vents 106 RSeat heating heating RRear window defroster "Immediate pre-entry climate control" is automatically switched off when operational readiness mode is requested. Climate control RWindshield The colors of the indicator lamps in the button have the following meanings: Red Heating activated Blue Cooling activated Yellow Pre-entry climate control at departure is preselected Setting the departure time You can set a departure time for the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time". Your vehicle will then be cooled or heated until the desired temperature is reached in time for the set departure time. "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" will be activated a maximum of 35 minutes before departure. If the departure is delayed, the vehicle will be heated or cooled for a further five minutes. You can set the desired departure time in the ECELL submenu on the on-board computer (Y page 163). Activating immediate pre-entry climate control You can activate "Immediate pre-entry climate control" even if the vehicle interior is already at the desired temperature. This means that the vehicle interior continues to be cooled or heated, e.g. if the journey is interrupted for up to 50 minutes, and the interior temperature is kept constant. You can only set the desired temperature using the climate control unit. If you do not pre-select a temperature, the last temperature set will be automatically adopted. Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, open the air vents completely and set the adjusters to the central position. Setting the air vents To activate/deactivate "Immediate preentry climate control" X Press button : in the center console. The blue or red indicator lamp in the button lights up or goes out. : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent Air vents 107 To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; to the left. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise as far as it will go. X i The center and rear air vents are adjusted in Climate control the same way. Z 108 Driving Driving and parking Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Before driving away, you must ensure that, for your own safety and to avoid damage, the charging cable has been removed from the vehicle socket. Otherwise, you cannot shift the transmission out of position P. The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking is, in some operating modes, either reduced or not effective: Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery increases Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature Rwhen driving close to the maximum speed Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rin transmission position N Rduring and after ESP stability control If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Before commencing your journey, ensure that the charging cable required for charging the high-voltage battery is in the vehicle. SmartKey positions SmartKey g To remove the SmartKey (shift the transmission to position P) 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The drive system cannot be started. Start/Stop button General notes Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESSGO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the drive system. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the drive system starts immediately. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 66) Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will no longer be able to start the drive system with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 72), you can continue to start the drive system with the Start/Stop button. The drive system can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. Key positions with the Start/Stop button : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. For further information on situations in which an indicator lamp either fails to go out after the drive system is started or lights up while driving, Z 109 Driving and parking Driving Driving and parking 110 Driving please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster" (Y page 192). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. If you press Start/Stop button : once when in this position, the ignition is switched off again. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. You can only switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle is stationary. You must also engage park position P. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated Starting the engine Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the transmission out of park position P Rstart the vehicle's drive system. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Vehicles with an electric motor generate much less driving noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. This can happen, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave erratically. The vehicle is equipped with a sound generator. The sound generator is activated so that other road users can hear your vehicle better. The sound generator is activated at speeds of under 20 mph (30 km/h) and switches off automatically at higher speeds. Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. You can start the drive system if a valid key is in the vehicle. Switch off the drive system and always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 109). The drive system is started. Once the vehicle is ready to be driven, the Ready display (Y page 152) appears in the lower part of the multifunction display. It is only possible to move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever from position P to the desired selector lever position if you depress the brake pedal. The parking lock is then deactivated and the electrical parking brake is released automatically. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. Make sure that no charging cable is plugged in. The parking lock cannot be released if a charging cable is plugged in. Starting procedure with the SmartKey Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. To start the drive system using the key instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 (Y page 109) in the ignition lock and release it. The drive system is started. Once the vehicle is ready to be driven, the Ready display (Y page 152) appears in the lower part of the multifunction display. Pulling away The vehicle is equipped with a sound generator. At low speeds, an electric vehicle makes less noise than a vehicle with a combustion engine. The sound generator is activated so that other road users can hear your vehicle better. The sound generator is activated at speeds of under 20 mph (30 km/h) and switches off automatically at higher speeds. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake is automatically released (Y page 131). The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. Hill start assist G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe DIRECT SELECT lever is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. Further information on holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 114). Ryou Transmission Important safety notes Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P when the drive system is switched off and the vehicle is stationary. Park position P is engaged and the electric parking brake is applied automatically: Z 111 Driving and parking Transmission 112 Transmission Driving and parking If the DIRECT SELECT lever cannot be engaged in park position P, the parking brake is engaged automatically. Observe the important safety notes on switching ESP® on and off (Y page 63). DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D. Engaging park position P Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. When you have engaged park position P, make sure that the transmission position display shows P in the multifunction display. You can only engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary. The transmission shifts into park position P automatically if you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at very low speed with the transmission in position D or R. In addition, a warning tone sounds and a display message is shown. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in N neutral. In order to shift from park position P directly into R or D: X j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 112). Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display Rdepress the brake pedal and the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down past the first point of resistance Rpush Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi- cle is stationary. You could otherwise damage the drive system. X Depress the brake and keep it pressed. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. Transmission G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Shift to neutral N. Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Rshift the transmission out of park position P Rstart the vehicle's drive system. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. When the drive system is switched off, the transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the transmission automatically shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the transmission automatically shifts to P. If you want the transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Transmission positions B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P when the vehicle is stationary. The SmartKey can only be removed when the DIRECT SELECT lever is in position P. When there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock, the DIRECT SELECT lever is locked in position P. C Reverse gear Only move the DIRECT SELECT lever to R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral No power is transmitted from the drive system to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely. If ESP® is faulty: only move the DIRECT SELECT lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. 7 Drive For driving forwards X Z Driving and parking Shifting to neutral N 113 Transmission 114 Driving tips Driving and parking Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients Do not hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the accelerator pedal. Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by: Rdepressing the brake pedal Rengaging the electric parking brake Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The needle in the power display points to the boost area (Y page 153). X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. i Maximum acceleration is available for a limited time. X Press program selector button :. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. The transmission switches to automatic drive program E each time the drive system is started. X E Economy Comfortable, economical driving style S Sport Sporty driving style E+ Economy Plus Comfortable, particularly economical driving style Rocking the vehicle free Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance. Program selector button The program selector button allows you to choose between drive programs with different driving characteristics. Drive programs Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward gear unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rreduced power on the accelerator pedal increases sensitivity. This supports an even and economical driving style. Rthe wheels are less likely to spin. Rfull power output by using kickdown. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe entire power output can be utilized by depressing the accelerator pedal. Transmission Drive program E+ is characterized by the following: Rreduced torque and significantly reduced power. This supports an especially efficient and even driving style and results in a reduction in speed to approximately 70 mph (110 km/h). Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward gear unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe wheels are less likely to spin. Rparticularly efficient overrun. Rfull power output by using kickdown. Rthe performance of air-conditioning system and heating are reduced. Steering wheel paddle shifters Manually adjustable recuperation : Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter + You can increase or reduce recuperation in overrun mode using the steering wheel paddle shifters. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, recuperation occurs. The electric motor is then used as a alternator and energy is recovered while driving. The recuperated electrical energy is stored in the high-voltage battery. A higher energy recuperation level means that the vehicle is braked more powerfully. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Information on the Recuperative Braking System (Y page 64). To decrease recuperation: pull right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter ;. X To increase recuperation: pull left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter :. X The various recuperation levels are shown in the transmission position display once D has been selected (Y page 112). The following recuperation levels are available in overrun mode: recuperation (D+, coasting mode) Rmoderate recuperation (D) Rhigh recuperation (D-) Rrecuperation depending on the traffic situation (DAUTO, radar-based) You can see the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode by reading the recuperation performance value shown in the power display (Y page 153). Every time drive position D is selected, the transmission switches into recuperation level DAUTO automatically. The various different levels are to be used under the following conditions: Rno D+ Driving without much braking and without the presence of obstacles or sharp bends The vehicle retains the maximum possible amount of kinetic energy. D Normal driving D- Sporty driving or driving on a downhill gradient The brake pedal does not need to be used as often because the extent of the deceleration is greater than in D. Energy use when decelerating is considerably higher than when the vehicle is braked with the brake pedal. DAUTO (radarbased) The intensity of recuperation is automatically adjusted to the current traffic situation. Default setting In levels D and D-, deceleration can be controlled in an infinitely variable manner using the accelerator pedal. Z Driving and parking E+ Economy Plus 115 Driving and parking 116 Transmission The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking is, in some operating modes, either reduced or not effective: Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery increases Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature Rwhen driving close to the vehicle's maximum design speed Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rin transmission position N Rduring and after ESP stability control If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Radar-based recuperation The vehicle uses the Active Brake Assist sensors during radar-based recuperation (DAUTO). The sensors detect the distance to the vehicle ahead and its speed. The intensity of recuperation is then automatically adjusted to the current traffic situation. The range can then be increased by storing energy efficiently. Adjustment is infinitely variable from overrun mode (no recuperation) to maximum recuperation. Maintain sufficient distance to the vehicle in front. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate Active Brake Assist as a visual and acoustic aid. Examples of radar-based recuperation: RApproaching a slower vehicle, a decelerating vehicle or when following a vehicle downhill. Your vehicle decelerates slightly and increases recuperation. RDriving when no vehicle is detected in front or when a vehicle is detected in the far distance or an accelerating vehicle is detected. Your vehicle switches to overrun mode at higher speeds. RDriving on a steep downhill slope. Acceleration downhill is reduced and recuperation is increased. This is comparable with shifting down when driving downhill. To activate radar-based recuperation: pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ; towards you and hold for about one second. X To deactivate radar-based recuperation: briefly pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ; towards you. X If you change between radar-based and manual recuperation, the following levels are activated depending on the selection via the steering wheel paddle shifters: : Steering wheel selects D- (maximum paddle shifter recuperation) ; Steering wheel selects D+ (overrun) paddle shifter + In particular, the function of the radar sensors can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the radar sensor settings and operation checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. If the radar sensors are not available, the system switches automatically to level D with moderate recuperation. Have the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Automatic adjustment of recuperation on downhill gradients The vehicle can detect steep downhill gradients. To reduce acceleration downhill and to charge the high-voltage battery, recuperation is increased steplessly. This is comparable to the engine brake in a combustion engine when you downshift a gear on a downhill gradient. Automatic adjustment of recuperation on downhill gradients is available in level DAUTO or on High-voltage battery Intelligent recuperation During radar-based recuperation (DAUTO), the vehicle uses the map and camera data of Traffic Sign Assist in addition to the Active Brake Assist sensors. The rate of recuperation is then automatically adjusted to the current traffic situation, taking the current and future maximum speed into account. High-voltage battery Important safety notes G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a critical value. In this case flammable gas escapes through a ventilation valve on the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. G DANGER Connecting the charging cable to the mains supply via incorrectly installed mains sockets or by means of adapters, extension cables or similar could cause a fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, observe the following: ROnly connect the charging cable to mains sockets: - which have been properly installed and - which have been inspected by a qualified electrician RFor safety reasons, only use the charging cables supplied with the vehicle, or charging cables which have been approved for use with this vehicle. RNever use a damaged charging cable. RDo not use: - extension cables - extension reels - multiple sockets RNever use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle. RObserve the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter. G DANGER Connecting the charging cable to the wallbox via an incorrectly installed wallbox or adapter, extension cable or similar could cause a fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, observe the following: ROnly connect the charging cable to a wallbox that: - is installed correctly and - has been inspected by a qualified electrician RFor safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the highvoltage battery in an electric vehicle. Z Driving and parking vehicles without steering wheel paddle shifters in level D. 117 118 High-voltage battery use damaged charging cables. RDo not extend the charging cable. RDo not use an adapter. RAlways observe the safety notes in the wallbox's operating instructions. Driving and parking RNever The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. RDo not handle high-voltage components or the orange cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. RDo not touch high-voltage components or the orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system when a vehicle has been involved in a crash. RDo not touch any damaged components or damaged orange cables of the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system. RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltage electrical system components that are marked with a warning sticker. Notes on the charging cable Handling the charging cable and charging cable controls Do not leave the charging cable controls (Y page 123) hanging loose from an electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poor contact with the electrical outlet and malfunctions when charging the vehicle. To ensure that the brackets within the charging cable controls are not subjected to incorrect loads, observe the following: RNever lift or carry the controls by the charging cable connector or the mains plug. RTo transport the charging cable, the coiled part can be: - wrapped around the controls or - secured to the housing of the controls Heat generated by the charging cable and charging cable connector Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 117). During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector may heat up. The charging cable and charging cable connector will only heat up within the permissible limiting values, provided that: Rthe power supply and the charging cable are not damaged Rthe instructions for handling the charging cable and controls on the charging cable are observed Should the permissible heating temperature limits be exceeded, have the mains power supply checked. Electrical fuse against overvoltage ! Voltage surges in the mains supply can dam- age the vehicle. The vehicle is therefore equipped with a device which protects it from voltage surges in the mains supply. This device may be triggered during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may lead to the building's fuse being tripped and an interruption in the power supply. These functions protect the vehicle. After the building fuse is switched on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply without tripping of the building's fuse, it may take up to 15 minutes for charging to resume automatically. Switch on the building's fuse again after the electrical fuse against overvoltage has been tripped. Otherwise, the charging process cannot be continued. The high-voltage battery will not be charged and you may not be able to drive the vehicle. If other devices are protected by the same protective device, these are switched off as well when the protective device is triggered. Ensure that these other devices are still operational after reactivating the protection device. High-voltage battery Terms of use Observe the following notes: Rinformation on exceptions and limitations in warranty documentation and in the related Maintenance Booklet Rmaintenance notes for the high-voltage battery in the Maintenance Booklet Method of operation The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage battery for driving. The high-voltage battery stores the energy needed to operate the electric motor and releases it again. The electric motor uses energy that has been stored in the high-voltage battery when pulling away, accelerating and during the journey. In overrun mode (except D+), kinetic energy is converted by means of energy recuperation into electrical energy and stored in the high-voltage battery. The high-voltage battery can be charged as follows: Rthrough energy recuperation while the vehicle is in motion Rwith the charging cable at a mains socket while the vehicle is stationary Rwith the charging cable at a charging station while the vehicle is stationary The high-voltage battery can be charged using a single-phase charging cable in a voltage range from 100 V to 240 V. If the condition of charge drops to less than 13%, the high-voltage battery reserve indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Charge the high-voltage battery as soon as possible. Below a condition of charge of 5%, the performance of the vehicle is reduced. The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system switches off at a condition of charge of 0%. Use of the pre-entry climate control function may mean that the high-voltage battery is not fully charged. High and low outside temperatures Low outside temperatures The efficiency of the high-voltage battery is significantly reduced at very low outside temperatures. The high-voltage battery is then no longer able to provide the normal electrical power output. High outside temperatures To prevent damage to the high-voltage battery due to very high outside temperatures, the maximum power output of the high-voltage battery is reduced automatically. The E-CELL display indicates the maximum amount of power available (Y page 152). Notes on battery care Avoid storing or transporting the vehicle in high temperatures over a long period (e.g. container transport). If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary for longer periods, connect it to a power supply. Temperatures below Ò13 ‡ (Ò25 †) and over 104 ‡ (40 †), which affect the vehicle for a period of more than seven days, can cause irreversible damage. Discharged battery The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system switches off if the high-voltage battery is completely discharged. 30 seconds prior to this, you are informed of the switch-off by the Battery Level Too Low. Stop and Charge Immedi‐ ately message. This protects the battery from exhaustive discharge. It is not possible to restart the drive system until after charging. Do not leave the vehicle parked for longer than 14 days with a high-voltage battery condition of charge below 20%. You can check the condition of charge in the charge level display (Y page 153). Further information on the "Energy flow display" can be found in the "Trip" menu (Y page 157). Z Driving and parking Influences on the charging behavior and the charge state of the high-voltage battery 119 120 High-voltage battery Driving and parking Energy consumption and range This range is reduced by: Rhigh and low outside temperatures Ra non-anticipatory driving style Rswitching on consumers, e.g. air-conditioning system or heating The battery's physical characteristics are such that leaving the vehicle parked for an extended period at low outdoor temperatures without charging it can lead to: Ra reduction in battery performance Rlonger charge times In extreme cases, this could mean that the vehicle cannot be started. For this reason, connect the charging cable when leaving the vehicle parked for long periods at low outdoor temperatures. As a result of its basic characteristics, the amount of energy available from the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. This reduces: Rthe maximum range that can be achieved by the vehicle Rthe maximum output (acceleration) of the vehicle You can actively reduce the energy consumption of your vehicle in a number of ways, for example, by: Ran anticipatory driving style Rreducing the use of electrical consumers Rhaving the vehicle regularly maintained The charging time of the high-voltage battery may change over the course of its life. Observe the displays on energy usage (Y page 158) and range (Y page 158). The more often RANGE PLUS is used, the more the extended range is reduced. Therefore always check the range display before every journey (Y page 158). To switch on: press button :. The green Indicator lamp lights up. X To switch off: press button :. The indicator lamp goes out. RANGE PLUS switches off automatically if: Rthe charging cable is disconnected or Rthe charging process is complete Information on charging with RANGE PLUS (Y page 164). X Displays on energy consumption and range Displaying energy consumption and recuperated electric energy in the multimedia system: RANGE PLUS If you activate RANGE PLUS, the operating window of the battery will be extended at the next charging process. An extended driving range will be available to you for the next journey. Using RANGE PLUS shortens the service life of the battery. Therefore, only use RANGE PLUS if, for example: Rlong journeys are planned or Rthe availability of charging stations at the destination is limited : Energy consumption ; Recuperated electric energy Every bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute. Energy consumption indicator : may differ from the indicator in the From Start (Y page 156) trip computer in the Trip menu. Displaying energy consumption and recuperated electric energy: Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X To select Vehicle from the main function bar: turn and press the controller. The vehicle menu is displayed. X X To select Consumption Consumption: turn and press the controller. Energy consumption : and recuperated electric energy ; for the last 15 minutes of the journey are shown. Exiting the vehicle settings: X or The range display on the multimedia system navigation map is available on the 2D map display and a scale of 2 km to 100 km. X To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button. X To show the menu: slide 6 the controller. X To select Destination Destination: turn and press the controller. X Select Map Content. Content X Select Range on Map. Map Switch the display in the map on O or off ª. X To return to navigation mode: Press the % button on the controller twice. e-Navigator App (multimedia system) Press the % button on the controller. To select %: slide 6 and press the controller. To reset values: the values are reset along with the From Start trip computer (Y page 158). X Displaying the range on the multimedia system map : Current vehicle position ; Route when route guidance is active = View level displayed: charging stations (example) ? Range (80%) A Range (100%) : Current vehicle position ; Range = Range when route guidance is active (dark blue) The range can be displayed on the navigation map for electric vehicles. The range is shown as a circle around the current vehicle position. When route guidance is active, the range is also shown along the calculated route. This is done by respective coloring of the blue route on the navigation map. In addition to a simple circular display of the range, you can display the range taking destination accessibility into account. The foreseeable range with destination accessibility is then colored in. When the range is shown in color, a distinction is made between two areas: RPale area: 100% of range RDark area: 80% of range When route guidance is active, the route is marked in color. The range display with destination accessibility on the multimedia system's navigation map is available on the 2D map display and a map scale of 50 meters to 500 km. Z 121 Driving and parking High-voltage battery High-voltage battery 122 Displaying the range and destination accessibility via navigation mode: X or To switch to navigation mode: press the ß button. The map shows the vehicle's current position. From one of the other main functions: slide 5 the controller (e. g. in radio mode). The main function bar is displayed. X To select Navi from the main function bar: turn and press the controller. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X To call up e-Navigator: press the ß button. X To select Range on Map in the navigation menu: turn and press the controller. The range and destination accessibility are displayed on the navigation map. Driving and parking X Displaying the range and destination accessibility via Mercedes-Benz Apps: Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Set access data and connect to the Internet (see separate operating instructions) X To call up the telephone menu: press the % button. X To switch to the main function bar: slide 5 the controller. X To select Tel/ Tel/®: press the controller. X To select Internet Internet: turn and press the controller. The menu with the Internet functions is displayed. X To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: Apps turn and press the controller. The available Mercedes-Benz Apps are displayed. X To call up the e-Navigator App: turn and press the controller. The navigation map is displayed showing the range and destination accessibility X Showing the view levels on the map: X To display the menu: slide 6 and press the controller when the map appears. The menu of the view levels opens. You may choose from the following view levels: Ravailable charging stations route Rcurrent vehicle position with vehicle direction Rcurrent Exiting the map display: X or X Press the % button on the controller. To select %: slide 6 and press the controller. Charging the high-voltage battery via the electrical outlet Charging cable Important safety notes ! Only use the charging cable to charge the high-voltage battery. Do not use the charging cable for other purposes. It may otherwise be damaged. The vehicle is supplied with a single-phase 12 A charging cable. Only use the charging cable included with the vehicle, which has been approved for vehicle use. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 117). If you use the supplied 12 A charging cable to charge a high-voltage battery: Rthe charge time increases considerably Relectrical consumption increases considerably Where possible, charge the high-voltage battery at a charging station (Y page 125). Only then can certified electrical energy consumption levels be reached. i The charging process can vary depending on the charging station. Therefore, always observe the local information. Stowing the charging cable The charging cable can be stowed in a bag in the trunk of the vehicle. To do so, the bag must be secured to the cargo tie-down rings using the retaining strap provided. High-voltage battery : A/C status indicator ; Control system and electrical fuses indica- tor = Charge current indicator ? Charge current setting button When displays : and ; on the charging cable light up, this means the following: Display : Lights up green The external power supply connection is working properly. The high-voltage battery can be charged. Flashes red A malfunction has been detected in the external power supply. The high-voltage battery is recharged as soon as the electricity signal registers normal values. Lights up red There is a malfunction. The charging cable must be removed from the electrical outlet and then re-inserted. Display ; Lights up green There are no malfunctions. The high-voltage battery can be charged. Lights up red There is a malfunction. The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. For information on problems relating to the charging process, see (Y page 126). Setting the maximum charge current G WARNING If the charge current draw via a mains socket is too high during the charging process, the external electrical system may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before beginning the charging process, check the maximum permissible charge current locally. Consult a qualified expert to do so where necessary. If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings. ! An excessive charge current can blow a fuse or lead to overheating of the external power supply. Check whether the external power supply is compatible with the set charge current. If necessary, lower the set charge current or use another power socket. You can set a limit for the values of the charge current used in charging the high-voltage battery. This acts as a means of preventing the power supply from overloading. You can set this limit by using the controls on the charging cable or in the on-board computer's menu. Only set the maximum charge current in the on-board computer menu if there are no charge current settings on the charging cable. The default standard value is the minimum charge current setting. This corresponds to the minimum available charge current from the power supply. i The value of the maximum setting and the relevant adjustment values may vary depending on the country. Before charging the high-voltage battery, have the maximum permissible charge current for the Z Driving and parking Controls on the charging cable 123 Driving and parking 124 High-voltage battery relevant power socket checked by an electrician. X To adjust the setting: press button ? repeatedly until the desired setting is selected in display =. RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum setting RAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting Information about the charging time (Y page 286) If, after the charging process, the charging cable is: Rleft connected to the mains socket, the set value will be used for the next charging process. Rremoved from the power socket, the values will be reset to the minimum setting for the next charging process. You may then need to reset the values of the maximum charge current. If the charge current values that have been set on the charging cable and the on-board computer are different, the high-voltage battery is charged using the lower value. If the vehicle requires more time than usual to charge the high-voltage battery, check: Rthe settings of the maximum charge current on the controls of the charging cable Rthe settings of the maximum charge current in the menu of the on-board computer Connecting the charging cable : ; = ? A B C To open the charge socket flap Tire pressure table Socket cap Fastener Reference sticker (voltage range) Vehicle socket Warning sticker (charging cable) Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P. Switch the ignition off. X Press the charge socket flap in the direction of arrow :. The charge socket flap swings up. X Slide fastener ? to the right. Socket cap = is open. X Insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet to the stop. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket B to the stop. The high-voltage battery is being charged. The vehicle must not be moved while the charging cable is connected or during charging. X X i Depending on the temperature, the engine cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on when the charging High-voltage battery Removing the charging cable ! Before driving away, you must ensure that, for your own safety and to avoid damage, the charging cable has been removed from the vehicle socket. Otherwise, you cannot shift the transmission out of position P. When the charge level display reaches 100%, the battery is fully charged (Y page 153). When the battery is charged: Press and hold button D on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable from vehicle socket B. X Close socket cap =. X Close the charge socket flap. X Remove the charging cable from the electrical outlet. X Stow the charging cable safely in the vehicle (Y page 122). can activate the charging station by using an RFID card or via telephone activation. Observe the on-site operator instructions for the charging station. When the vehicle is connected to the charging station, information and details on technical parameters are exchanged. It can thus take up to 30 seconds for the charging process to begin. Driving and parking cable is connected or during the charging process. Connecting the charging cable X Charging high-voltage battery at a charging station/wallbox General notes Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 117). Charging communication at a charging station The charging station first has to be activated before you can charge at a charging station. You 125 : ; = ? A B C To open the charge socket flap Tire pressure table Socket cap Fastener Reference sticker (voltage range) Vehicle socket Warning sticker (charging cable) Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P. Switch the ignition off. X Press the charge socket flap in the direction of arrow :. The charge socket flap swings up. X Slide fastener ? to the right. Socket cap = is open. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket B to the stop. The high-voltage battery is being charged. X X Z 126 High-voltage battery The vehicle must not be moved while the charging cable is connected or during charging. i Depending on the temperature, the engine Driving and parking cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on when the charging cable is connected or during the charging process. Removing the charging cable ! Before driving away, you must ensure that, for your own safety and to avoid damage, the charging cable has been removed from the vehicle socket. Otherwise, you cannot shift the transmission out of position P. When the charge level display reaches 100%, the battery is fully charged (Y page 153). When the battery is charged: Press and hold button D on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable from vehicle socket B. X Close socket cap =. X Close the charge socket flap. X Problems with the charging process Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charge socket flap cannot be opened. X The charge socket flap is not unlocked. Unlock the vehicle (Y page 66). The SmartKey batteries are discharged. X Unlock the vehicle manually using the SmartKey (Y page 68). The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Lock and unlock the vehicle. If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The high-voltage battery is not being charged. A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the charging process. X Ensure that the charging cable is connected to the electrical outlet. X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and wait 30 seconds; then re-insert it into the vehicle socket. X If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. The high-voltage battery The electrical outlet is faulty. is not charged during the X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioning propcharging process when erly. connected to a power or socket. X Use a different electrical outlet. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket. The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked. X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. The snap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked. X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is blocked. Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. X Try to remove the blockage. X Online access to the vehicle General notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating integrated information systems and communications equipment. Only use information systems and communications devices if this is permitted while driving and if the traffic situation permits. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. From the "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage", you can call up remote query and remote configuration functions for your vehicle. This is possible from an Internet-enabled computer, as well as many modern smartphones. You can access the "Vehicle Homepage" via your web browser. Please call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) to obtain the relevant Internet address. In order to use the "Vehicle Homepage", you must agree to the applicable terms of use. The contractual periods of mbrace apply to the "Vehicle Homepage". To use the "Vehicle Homepage", you require an activated mbrace access and a separate activation or registration for the "Vehicle Homepage". Further information about the supported end devices, available languages and contractual periods is available at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. In order to call up the "Vehicle Homepage", the vehicle must be connected to the Internet. This is possible via the radio module (Y page 128). Notes on data protection Bear in mind that the "Vehicle Homepage" offers access to your data. Therefore, look after the vehicle verification code (VVC) and your user details carefully. The vehicle verification code (VVC) is required when you register for the first time on the "Vehicle Homepage". Using this code, the vehicle and the user access are linked to each other on the "Vehicle Homepage", enabling the intended usage. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Prevent unauthorized persons from accessing this data. Every person who has access to the information stated can use the functions on the "Vehicle Homepage". RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to delete the vehicle from your personal area on the "Vehicle Homepage". Additionally, you Z 127 Driving and parking High-voltage battery Driving and parking 128 Parking must destroy documents containing the vehicle verification code (VVC). RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is possible that the previous owner still has access to the "Vehicle Homepage". If in doubt, have a new vehicle verification code (VVC) issued by the Mercedes-Benz Center after purchase. With the code you can set up access to your vehicle, as described in the section "Setting up a personal area" on the Vehicle Homepage". There, you may also deactivate the existing access of the previous owner. Calling up functions in the "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage" The "My Mercedes Electric - Vehicle Homepage" allows you access to information about your vehicle and its functions using remote query and remote configuration. For example, climate control can be activated using remote configuration which means that it need not be set in the vehicle. Power for the climate control is primarily supplied via the charging cable connected to the mains supply. In most cases, this does not reduce the range. If climate control is activated, the condition of charge and thus the range may be reduced. The "Vehicle Homepage" provides you with information all about how to use your vehicle. If the vehicle is entered in your personal area of the "Vehicle Homepage", you can also access the following functions: Rrequest the current condition of charge of the high-voltage battery Rprogram the departure time (Y page 163) Rorder and activate the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function If the vehicle is charging, the predicted charging time and the predicted range will also be shown. This data is estimated and may be influenced by the following factors: Routside temperature Rswitched on consumers, e.g. climate control and seat heating Rpersonal driving style Rroad and traffic conditions Rroute characteristics Therefore, allow for a sufficient reserve. i Information on additional functions and operating instructions can be found on the "Vehicle Homepage". Connecting the vehicle to the Internet Via a radio module This function is not available in all countries and requires an activated mbrace access. You can use the "Vehicle Homepage" if the vehicle has a connection to the Internet via a mobile phone. The radio module uses a mobile phone connection and transmits the necessary data by radio. The vehicle automatically recognizes whether a connection to the Internet via the radio module is possible or not. No presets are necessary. To enable the transfer of data via the mobile communications module, you do not need a SIM card. i Restrictions in reception are possible if the vehicle is in an underground car park, for example. Restrictions may also occur in areas with poor mobile network coverage. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING If you release the parking brake on uphill or downhill gradients, the vehicle can begin to move when in park position P. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rprevent the parked vehicle from rolling on uphill or downhill gradients by always applying the parking brake. Rdo not park the vehicle on uphill or downhill gradients if the parking brake is malfunctioning. Parking If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease Rshift P. the parking brake. the transmission out of park position Rstart the vehicle's drive system. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! While the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, at low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is engaged automatically and the electrical parking brake is applied. The transmission could be damaged. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P. Rthe SmartKey in the ignition lock must be turned to position 0 and removed from the ignition lock. Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front wheels must be turned towards the curb. Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position P. With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 109). The drive system and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position 0: "Key removed". X X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the transmission automatically shifts to N. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the transmission automatically shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the transmission automatically shifts to P. If you want the transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Switching off the drive system G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This can affect the power steering and the brake boosting effect, for example. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Z Driving and parking G WARNING 129 130 Parking Electric parking brake Applying or releasing manually General notes Driving and parking G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease Rshift P. the parking brake. the transmission out of park position Rstart the vehicle's drive system. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The function of the electric parking brake and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunction in the system: Rit may not be possible to apply the released parking brake Rit may no longer be possible to shift the transmission to position P X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the transmission to position P. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake carries out a function check at regular intervals when the drive system is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. X To engage: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. X To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button Applying automatically When the vehicle's HOLD function is holding the vehicle at a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged automatically. In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe drive system is switched off. Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Driving tips Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe vehicle has been started. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 130). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Release parking brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Driving tips General notes Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Z Driving and parking Releasing automatically 131 132 Driving tips Driving and parking Drive sensibly – save energy Observe the following tips to save energy: RThe tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. RRemove unnecessary loads. RRemove roof racks when they are not needed. RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. Energy consumption also increases when driving in low or high outside temperatures, in stopstart traffic, on short journeys and in hilly terrain. Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the battery charge level has dropped into the reserve range, the display message Battery Reserve Level is shown instead of range ? in the multifunction display. The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of the acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant(continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: RLoad RTire pressure RCold start RChoice of route RActive electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. To achieve a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant", drive the vehicle in drive program E+ or E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 158). For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 156). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you increase the recuperation level on slippery road surfaces, the drive wheels may lose their traction. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not increase the recuperation level on slippery road surfaces. The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking is, in some operating modes, either reduced or not effective: Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery increases Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature Rwhen driving close to the maximum speed Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rin transmission position N Rduring and after ESP stability control If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Downhill gradients On long, steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by selecting maximum recuperation. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively. Recuperation allows the vehicle to be decelerated without placing a load on the braking system. Do not depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brakes to rub by constantly applying light pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Z 133 Driving and parking Driving tips 134 Driving tips Driving and parking Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. ! A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! As the ESP® system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition must be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if: Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer (for a maximum of ten seconds) Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle raised. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may seriously damage the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (Y page 59). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Checking brake lining thickness You can measure the break pad/lining thickness using a test gage. Color-coding (green or red) on the test gage allows you to determine whether the brake pad/lining thickness is still sufficient. The test gage is in the vehicle document wallet in the glove box. Driving tips Hold test gage A vertically on brake disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto brake disc :. X Check which color field ? the arrow on measuring pin ; is pointing to. Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is sufficient. Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To avoid an inaccurate measurement: Rmake sure you position the wheels suitably Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess in the brake disc 135 Front wheel Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tires have adequate tread depth For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed Ravoid ruts Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully Driving on flooded roads Rear wheel Bring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable position so that you can attach test gage A. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Engage park position P. X Switch off the drive system. X Place test gage A between the wheel's spokes on brake pad/lining =. X ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage. Winter driving G WARNING If you increase the recuperation level on slippery road surfaces, the drive wheels may lose Z Driving and parking X 136 Driving systems Driving and parking their traction. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not increase the recuperation level on slippery road surfaces. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 259). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 259). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 259). Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Driving systems Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into transmission position D- (Y page 115) on long and steep downhill gradients. This increases recuperation in overrun mode. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. When the engine is running, you can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed between 20 mph (30 km/h) and the technically permitted maximum speed of the vehicle. Activates or increases speed Activates or reduces speed Deactivates cruise control Activates at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. : ; = ? Activation conditions Setting a speed To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X To adjust the set speed in10 km/hincrements:briefly press cruise control lever : up beyond the pressure point for a higher speed, or down ; for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed beyond the point of resistance until the desired speed is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X X or X To adjust the set speed in1 km/hincrements:briefly press cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the point of resistance until the desired speed is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Rthe vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Z 137 Driving and parking Driving systems 138 Driving systems i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. HOLD function Driving and parking General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened Rthe electric parking brake is released Rthe transmission position D, R or N is engaged Activating the HOLD function Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! If the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 138). Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission: only when the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is insufficient. The Brake Immediately message may also appear in the multifunction display. X Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. The HOLD function is deactivated. The horn sounds at regular intervals if you have switched off the engine, released the seat belt and opened the driver's door with the HOLD function activated. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact that the HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. The vehicle cannot be locked until you have deactivated the HOLD function. i After switching off the engine, it can only be started again once you have deactivated the HOLD function. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Important safety notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually and audibly indicates the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes of a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause Parking Assist PARKTRONIC to malfunction. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Range of the sensors General notes Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into account obstacles located: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 237). Z 139 Driving and parking Driving systems 140 Driving systems Warning displays Driving and parking Range : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness : Detection range of front sensors ; Detection range of rear sensors Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Corners Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The transmission position of the automatic transmission and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission posi- Warning display tion D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas activated rolling backwards P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Driving systems Deactivating or activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. i Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati- cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Driving and parking This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. : Indicator lamp ; Deactivates or activates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Problem 141 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactithe Parking Assist vated. PARKTRONIC warning X If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a displays are lit. You also qualified specialist workshop. hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interthe Parking Assist ference. PARKTRONIC warning X Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 237). displays are lit. Parking X Switch the ignition back on. Assist PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at a different location. Z 142 Driving systems Parking Pilot Driving and parking General notes Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention can assist you during maneuvering and parking. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is also available (Y page 139). Important safety notes Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking Pilot is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the warning messages of Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking procedure (Y page 140). RYou can intervene to correct the steering procedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load that protrudes from your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot. RNever use Parking Pilot when snow chains are mounted. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are: Rparallel to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the detection range of Parking Pilot will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RParking Pilot may steer in too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot. Rthe For further information on the detection range (Y page 139). Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in spaces parallel to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe parking space is apparently blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Driving systems range of movement is too small parking space is bordered by an obstacle which is not clearly defined such as a tree or a trailer : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Parking Pilot is activated automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel to the direction of travel Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. Parking Pilot only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain activated until you confirm the use of Parking Pilot by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING Parking Pilot merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. If you do not apply the brakes yourself, there is the risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself while maneuvering and parking. Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Parking Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Parking Pilot is canceled. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. X Stop when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. X X The Parking Pilot Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. X Stop when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Z Driving and parking Rthe Rthe 143 Driving and parking 144 Driving systems The Parking Pilot Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Parking Pilot Ended message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. Parking Pilot no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Parking Pilot is ended, you must steer and brake again yourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Parking Pilot guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should abort the parking procedure with Parking Pilot. RYou can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order for Parking Pilot to support you when exiting the parking space: Ryou need to have parked using Parking Pilot. Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvered into the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. Parking Pilot can assist you with exiting a parking space only if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Parking Pilot. Start the engine. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you will drive out of the parking space. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Parking Pilot? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure:press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Parking Pilot: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise, Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. X Stop when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Parking Pilot immediately steers in the other direction. The Parking Pilot Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Sur‐ roundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted by the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Parking Pilot Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is X X Driving systems Canceling Parking Pilot X or Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The Parking Pilot Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 141). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled. The Parking Pilot Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Parking Pilot is canceled automatically when: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Parking Pilot is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Parking Pilot Canceled message. When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. X Rear view camera General notes Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the multimedia system display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the multimedia system display. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 238). Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 238) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). Z Driving and parking useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. 145 Driving systems 146 Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the multimedia system display. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Driving and parking X Messages in the multimedia system display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking of the tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle Driving systems 147 : Front warning display ; Additional measurement operational readi- ness indicator for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC = Rear warning display When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 140), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system display. If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display. imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 146). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle "Reverse parking" function Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 146). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. Z Driving and parking = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Driving systems Driving and parking 148 : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Wide-angle function : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning dis- plays Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Displaying the attention level You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 162) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 162). The following information is displayed: RLength of the journey since the last break. RThe Attention Level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Passive message appears. The bar display then changes the display, such as when you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 163). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Standard selected: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a Break!. Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. Z 149 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 150 If necessary, take a break. Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system: if a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated or deactivated in the multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Driving and parking X Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring range of the sensors In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike or bicycle Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the Driving systems Warning display Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 163). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. X : Warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light. Z Driving and parking case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. 151 152 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise. If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or L position, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. READY indicator You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 32). When the drive system is started and the vehicle is ready to drive, READY indicator : appears in the multifunction display. This indicates that the vehicle is operational. Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 155). There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature appears in the multifunction display. E-CELL display Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob. G WARNING There is a risk of an accident if you accelerate or overtake when the power output of the drive system is reduced. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive particularly carefully. Charge the high-voltage battery at a charge station immediately. Start the drive system (Y page 111). E-CELL display : shows the available power of the drive system. Under normal operating conditions, E-CELL display : is in the maximum range. The power output available may deviate from the maximum range in the event of: Rvery high or low outside temperatures Rvery high performance requirements for a longer period of time Rvery low condition of charge of the high-voltage battery Ra malfunction in the drive system The reduced power output can be improved by charging the high-voltage battery (Y page 117). X Power display If the needle for the power display is in the OFF position, the vehicle is not ready to drive because: Rthe drive system has not yet started Rthe charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket Rthere is insufficient power available from the high-voltage battery Rthe vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is malfunctioning When the drive system is started, the needle in the power display moves to position 0. The display Ready appears in the lower multifunction display. The vehicle is ready to drive. The boost area for maximum acceleration can be reached using kickdown (Y page 114). The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking is, in some operating modes, either reduced or not effective: Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery increases Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature Rwhen driving close to the maximum speed Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rin transmission position N Rduring and after ESP stability control If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Condition of charge display Power display : contains two areas: RArea above 0 Here, the current amount of power that the drive system is feeding to the wheels is displayed. RArea below 0 Here, the vehicle's recuperative power in overrun mode is displayed. Condition of charge display : shows the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery. The charge value is shown as a percentage in the Energy Flow menu in the instrument cluster (Y page 157). Z 153 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 154 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays i The Energy Flow menu can also be dis- played in the COMAND/Audio display. The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range if the drive system is running and: Drive Battery Reserve Level message appears in the display Rthe indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up Charge the high-voltage battery from a condition of charge of less than 20% at: Ran electrical outlet Ra charging station The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking is, in some operating modes, either reduced or not effective: Rwhen the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery increases Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature Rwhen the vehicle is almost stationary Rin transmission position N Rduring and after ESP stability control If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Operating the on-board computer Overview Rthe : Multifunction display ; Vehicles with Audio 20: switches on voice- operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) Vehicles with COMAND: switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) = Right control panel ? Left control panel A Back button X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Displays and operation = ; RCalls 9 : Press briefly: up the menu and menu bar Back button % RBack RVehicles with Audio 20: Switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used RExits the telephone book/redial memory RScrolls in lists a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number RSelects 9 : a Press briefly: Press and hold: RIn the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range or an audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Multifunction display RConfirms the selection or display message RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number Right control panel 8 RMute W X RAdjusts ~ RRejects 6 the volume or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches : ; = ? A B C Range Time Text field Menu bar Drive program Transmission position (Y page 112) Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 165) Z On-board computer and displays Left control panel 155 Menus and submenus 156 On-board computer and displays X To display menu bar?: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ? is faded out after a few seconds. Text field = shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages. X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears. Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" i Set the time using the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Rj Parking Pilot (Y page 142) Cruise control (Y page 136) Rë HOLD function (Y page 138) RCRUISE Menus and submenus Menu overview Using the = or ; button on the steering wheel, open the menu bar. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 154). Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RTrip menu (Y page 156) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 158) RAudio menu (Y page 160) menu (telephone) (Y page 160) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 162) RServ. menu (Y page 163) RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 163) The displays for the Audio Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly to those in your vehicle. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND. RTel : ; = ? Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. Reset X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 158). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Start Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. Reset ECO display Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO DISPLAY. DISPLAY If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 132). X Trip menu Standard display Distance Driving time Average speed Average electrical consumption Menus and submenus Energy flow display The energy flow display can be shown in the multifunction display and in the COMAND/ Audio display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select Energy Flow. Flow The active components are highlighted in the energy flow display. The energy flow is indicated by arrows. The arrows have a different color depending on the operating state: RGreen: energy recuperation RWhite: normal energy consumption RRed: increased energy consumption The arrows for the energy flow are shown in green. Normal driving On-board computer and displays Energy flow The drive system powers the vehicle. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in white. Boost driving mode Drive system switched on when the vehicle is stationary or in overrun mode If high power is required, the boost mode takes effect. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in red. Energy recuperation mode The drive system is switched on while the vehicle is stationary. Alternatively, the drive system is switched on while the vehicle is in transmission position D+ or N. The arrows indicating energy flow are not shown. Drive system switched off and high-voltage battery being charged 157 The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electrical energy. The Recuperative Brake System is active. The high-voltage battery is being charged. The arrows for the energy flow are shown in green. The drive system is switched off. The charging cable is connected and the high-voltage battery is being charged. Z Menus and submenus 158 On-board computer and displays Displaying the range and current consumption Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range and current fuel consumption. The approximate range depends on the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery and your current driving style. If the high-voltage battery condition of charge is low, the display shows a vehicle being charged instead of the approximate range. The specified values for range depend on the driving program selected and may vary as a result of: Rhigher and lower outside temperatures Rthe style of driving Ractivated electrical consumers X Digital speedometer Press a to confirm. Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. X X Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation in the separate multimedia system operating instructions. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. Route guidance not active Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. X Resetting values Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. X : Direction of travel ; Current road Menus and submenus No change of direction announced = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol : ; = ? Distance to destination Distance to the next change of direction Current road "Follow the road's course" symbol Change of direction without lane recommendation On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended =: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane. Other status indicators of the navigation system : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation The navigation system displays additional information and the vehicle status. Possible displays: RNew Route... or Calculating Route A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display Z On-board computer and displays Route guidance active 159 160 Menus and submenus Audio menu On-board computer and displays Selecting a radio station : Active station list ; Station frequency with memory position The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until the preset list or station list in the desired frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. You can find further information on operation in the "Satellite radio" section of the separate multimedia system operating instructions. Operating an audio player or audio media : Current title Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system and then audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track appears. If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and title of the track. Video DVD operation You can only operate DVD videos in the Audio menu in vehicles with COMAND. X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : appears. Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehi- Menus and submenus When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the multimedia system; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RTelephone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RTelephone No service service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call You can end or reject a call anytime, even if you are not in the Tel menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 9, : or a button to switch to the phone book. X Authorize access to the phone book on the phone. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the 9 or : button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name:press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make a call: press the ~ or % button. X Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If you do not want to make the call: press the ~ or % button. Z On-board computer and displays cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. 161 Menus and submenus 162 Assistance menu On-board computer and displays Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the DriveAssist menu: RDisplaying the assistance graphic (Y page 162) RDeactivating/activating ESP® (Y page 162) RActivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist (Y page 162) RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 163) RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist (Y page 163) Displaying the assistance graphic Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance Graphic. Graphic X Press a to confirm. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RActive Brake Assist (Y page 60) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 148) RRear window wiper (Y page 95) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 62). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 62). X Start the drive system. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select ESP ESP. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the drive system is running. If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 195). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 168). Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Brake Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 60). X Menus and submenus Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 148). X Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 150). X Service menu Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Serv. menu: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 167) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 263) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 233) Settings menu Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Sett. menu: RChanging the E-CELL settings RChanging the instrument cluster settings RChanging the light settings RChanging the vehicle settings RRestoring the factory settings E‑CELL menu Departure time In the E-CELL menu you can choose to cool down or heat the vehicle interior for a predefined departure time. If you have engaged P and the charging cable is connected, the on-board computer displays: Rthe expected charge time of the high-voltage battery or Rthe RANGE PLUS condition of charge for the departure time set. Changing the departure time X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the E‑CELL menu. X Press 9 or : to select Depart. Time Time. X Press a to confirm. You will see the selected setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select A, B or Change C. C X Press a to confirm. X Press = or ; to select Depart. Time Hours. Hours X Press the 9 or : button to set the hour. X Press = or ; to select Depart. Time Minutes. Minutes X Press 9 or : to set the minutes. X Press a to confirm. After changing from one menu to another, the departure time setting is stored. Z On-board computer and displays Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST 163 Menus and submenus 164 Selecting the departure time Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the E‑CELL menu. X Press 9 or : to select Depart. Time Time. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select one of the three departure times or Timer Off (no timer active). X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays X Charging with RANGE PLUS If you have engaged P and the charging cable is connected, the on-board computer displays: Rthe expected charge time of the high-voltage battery or Rthe RANGE PLUS condition of charge for the departure time set RANGE PLUS charges when: Ryou have activated RANGE PLUS via the center console prior to charging and Rthe high-voltage battery is fully charged If charging is not complete by departure time, the maximum range will not be available. i To heat or cool the vehicle interior for a desired departure time, the high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged. Activate the climate control function primarily when the high-voltage battery is being charged. You must also set a departure time using the ECELL submenu (Y page 163). Switching "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" on/off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press 9 or : to select Pre-Entry Climate Ctrl. at Departure Time:. Time: X Press a to activate or deactivate. The vehicle interior will then be heated or cooled prior to the predefined departure time. If a departure time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary heating button. You can use the on-board computer to specify up to three departure times in the E-CELL submenu. One of the specified departure times may be preselected (Y page 163). X Pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey) Example: RSet departure time: 6:41 a.m. REnd time for standard high-voltage battery charging: 6:00 a.m. RRANGE PLUS condition of charge at 6:41 a.m.: half of the additional range RThe maximum additional range is decreased by 50 percent. Pre-entry climate control at time of departure If you activate the "Rem. Climate Control at departure time" function, the vehicle interior is heated or cooled prior to a desired departure time. Pre-entry climate control via the key is switched on temporarily when the vehicle is unlocked using the key. In order to switch on pre-entry climate control via the SmartKey, the function has to be activated using the on-board computer. Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control via the key Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press 9 or : to select Pre-Entry Climate Ctrl. (Via Key):. Key): X Press a to activate or deactivate. If pre-entry climate control via key is activated, pre-entry climate control using the key is switched on temporarily when you unlock the vehicle. X Menus and submenus Before charging the high-voltage battery, check the maximum permissible charge current for the relevant power socket. You can set a maximum charge current in the ECELL menu. It is only necessary to select the maximum charge current if there are no charge current settings on the charging cable. i The maximum charge current values in the on-board computer may deviate from the charging cable values. Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles miles. X Press the a button to save the setting. X The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent energy consumption and approximate range RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise control RASSYST PLUS service interval display ROdometer Example: changing the charge current : Setting the maximum charge current i This menu is not available in some coun- tries. In this case, the maximum charge current for the power socket is limited to a fixed level, depending on the country concerned. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Use 9 or : to select the E-CELL submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press 9 or : to select Maximum Charge Current:. Current: X Press a to confirm. X Press 9 or : in the submenu to select desired maximum charge current :. X Press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel to confirm. The high-voltage battery is charged with the selected maximum charge current. Instrument cluster Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. Switching the additional speedometer on/off If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status area of the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer [mph] function. You will see the selected setting: On or Off Off. X Press the a button to save the setting. Selecting permanent display The Permanent Display: function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. Z On-board computer and displays Setting the maximum charge current 165 Menus and submenus 166 Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Permanent Display: function. The current setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer [km/h] Speedometer [mph] appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. On-board computer and displays X Lights Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and the W symbol in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 87). Vehicle Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Automatic Door Lock function. If the Automatic Door Lock function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the doors in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. X If you activate the Automatic door locks function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 73). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the multifunction display shows the & symbol in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting. Restoring the factory settings Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes. Yes X Press the a button to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. For safety reasons, not all functions are reset. For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Light submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. X Display messages 167 Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 138) RParking (Y page 128) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, Messages for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. Messages X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. X Z On-board computer and displays Introduction 168 Display messages On-board computer and displays Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function, RBS (Recuperative Brake System) and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. The !, ÷, å and é (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function, RBS and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. The !, ÷, å, é (USA only) or J (Canada only) and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, RBS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. The , ÷, å and é (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 169 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 170 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, RBS and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. The , ÷, å and é (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. T! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLD function, RBS and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. Active Brake Assist may have also failed. A warning tone sounds. The ÷, å, ! and é (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake F(USA only)!(Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 130). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. only) Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually. ing Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 130). F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 171 On-board computer and displays Display messages 172 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 276). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 130). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the drive system. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. only) Parking Brake Inop‐ erative If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. X If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. A warning tone sounds. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear Inoperative Z 173 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 174 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual Active Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Active Brake Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Start the drive system again. Active Brake Assist is unavailable due to a malfunction. SituationActive Brake Assist: System Inop‐ dependent parking assistance may also have failed. erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Man‐ ual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable. A warning tone also sounds. Active Brake Assist is available again once the cause of the problem is no longer present. The display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Switch off the drive system. X Clean all sensors (Y page 237). X Start the drive system again. The display message disappears. ã The sound generator is not working. The vehicle can still be driven; however, no vehicle sounds can be generated. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, or it may not be heard at all. X Drive with particular care, allowing for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Acoustic Vehicle Indication Inopera‐ tive Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). 6 Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 6 The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. 6 The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Center Malfunc‐ G WARNING tion Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 175 On-board computer and displays Display messages 176 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though: bag Disabled See Operator's Manual Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 46) RThe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger¶Airbag Disabled¶See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 46). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: bag Enabled See Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 46) RThe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 177 178 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 46). Lights i Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters: The display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all of the LEDs in the lamp have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Corner‐ ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal Check Center Brake Lamp Display messages b Check Left Brake LamporCheck Lamp Check Right Brake Lamp b Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam b License Plate Lamp b Rear Fog Lamp b Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp b Backup Light b Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp b Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X On-board computer and displays Display messages 179 The left or right-hand high beam is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear fog lamp is faulty. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The backup lamp is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays 180 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 90). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Rear Sidemarker Check Rear Sidemarker Left Lamp or Right Lamp b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light b Active Headlamps Inoperative The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The active light function is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. Malfunction See Operator's Manual Auto Lamp Function Inoperative Switch Off Lights b Switch On Headlamps You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Display messages 181 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant See Operator's Manual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the cooling X system. The drive system will otherwise be damaged. If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. # The 12 V battery is no longer being charged. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the drive system. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Do not drive on. X Do not tow the vehicle. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the drive system. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Do not drive on. X Do not tow the vehicle. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. See Operator's Man‐ ual Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual X High-voltage battery Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ý The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. When the remaining range is 0 km, the message appears again. The power available is then continuously reduced. The reduction in power is represented in the E-CELL display (Y page 152). X Charge the high-voltage battery. Û A warning tone also sounds. The E‑CELL display (Y page 152) and the charge level display (Y page 153) go down to 0. The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is so low that operation is no longer possible. The drive system cannot be restarted. If you then try to restart the drive system, the Batterieleistung zu gering, Anhalten, sofort laden (Battery capacity too low. Stop Charge immediately) message appears. X Park the vehicle and charge the high-voltage battery. Battery Reserve Level Batterieleistung zu gering, Anhalten, sofort laden(Battery laden capacity too low. Stop Charge immediately) Z On-board computer and displays Drive system On-board computer and displays 182 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ì Malfunctions are present in the drive system and/or in the cooling system. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Without starting engine again, con‐ sult workshop The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not switch off the drive system. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ì There is a serious malfunction in the drive system. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Do not tow the vehicle. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Malfunction Visit Workshop Stop Switch Engine Off Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. Attention Assist: Take a Break! À Attention Assist Inoperative ë Off ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 138). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 138). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Start the drive system again. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist is faulty. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Pilot Can‐ celed The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Parking Pilot again later (Y page 142). Parking Pilot Inop‐ erative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers. Parking Pilot will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 142). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the drive system and start it again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 183 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 184 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Parking Pilot Fin‐ ished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 136). or X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 162). Display messages 185 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Please Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 263). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 265). Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 241). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 263). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning Tire Mal‐ function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 241). Z On-board computer and displays Tires On-board computer and displays 186 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavaila‐ ble Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. TirePress. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Depress Brake to Start Engine You have attempted to start the drive system with the transmission in position N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D without starting the drive system. X Start the drive system. X Depress the brake pedal. i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you can only shift out of position P into another transmission position when the engine is running. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Close the driver's door completely. Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. X Do not tow the vehicle. X X The vehicle is moving. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying tionary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. A ? The tailgate is open. Close the tailgate. X The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all the doors. X Z 187 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 188 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ Check Washer Fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 232). Wiper Malfunction‐ ing X Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc‐ tioning î Charger Cable Con‐ nected The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The hazard warning lamps are faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket. Remove the charging cable from vehicle socket. X Display messages 189 SmartKey  Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. Use the correct SmartKey. X  The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds X Remove the SmartKey.  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the battery (Y page 69).  The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. You open the driver's door with the drive system switched off. The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the drive system is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the drive system. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Locate the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition Obtain a New Key Replace Key Battery Don't Forget Your Key Key Not Detected (red display message) There is interference from a strong source of radio waves, and as a result the SmartKey is not detected while the drive system is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey mode. Z On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 190 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. Key Not Detected (white display message)  Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after the drive system is started or during a journey. Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the drive system, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). ü N After starting the drive system, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning tone ceases. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the drive system starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 42). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z 191 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions éJ N The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. é (USA only) J(Canada only): the yellow RBS/brake system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The brake system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Drive on taking extra care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow RBS/brake system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. RBS (Recuperative Brake System) is unavailable due to a malfunction. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the function listed above. The braking effect may be impaired. X Drive on taking extra care. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. ! ÷å éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow ABS, ESP®, ESP® OFF and RBS/brake system warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems may also not be available, e.g. the navigation system. Z 193 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 194 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ÷å éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow ABS, ESP®, ESP® OFF and RBS/brake system warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution), the HOLD function and hill start assist are also deactivated, for example. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ÷å éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow ABS, ESP®, ESP® OFF and RBS/brake system warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP®, RBS, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ! ÷å $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ABS, ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. BAS, RBS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 195 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 196 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 63) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 62). å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 63) , it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 62). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and RBS/ brake system warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ESP®, RBS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 197 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 198 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷å éJ N é (USA only), J (Canada only): the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and RBS/ brake system warning lamps are lit while the drive system is running. ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The braking performance of the electric motor using recuperative braking may be either reduced or not effective. If you do not make an additional effort to apply the brake yourself, the braking effect may not be sufficient. If necessary, counteract the reduced regenerative braking effect by applying the brake yourself. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. !F N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the drive system is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 199 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ý N The yellow battery charge warning lamp is on. The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. X Charge the high-voltage battery. Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist (Y page 60). Z On-board computer and displays Drive system 200 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 241). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 263). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. General notes The multimedia system section in this Operator's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). However, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs). G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Z 201 Multimedia system Function restrictions Operating system 202 Operating system Overview General notes Multimedia system ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the q control knob. Adjusting the volume Turn the q control knob. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call X Switching the sound on or off X Press the 8 button on the control panel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. Operating system Calling up and exiting favorites To call up: press the g button on the controller. X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. X To exit: press the g button again. X Adding favorites Adding a predefined favorite Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes : ; = ? Adds a new favorite Renames a selected favorite Moves a selected favorite Deletes a selected favorite Press the g button. Slide 6 the controller. The menu bar is shown. X Select Reassign Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favorites are displayed. X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Adding your own favorite Select Vehicle VehicleQClimate Climate Control Control. Press and hold the g button until the favorites are displayed. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Options OptionsQRoute Route Settings Settings. Notes for route types: X REco Route Traffic Route Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account (not available in all countries). RDynamic Z Multimedia system Favorites 203 Operating system 204 TRF. Route After Request You can decide whether or not current traffic reports should be included in the route calculation (not available in all countries). RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. In order to do so, instead of Start Start, select the menu item Continue Continue. X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options. Options X Select a route option. Notes for route options: Multimedia system RDynamic RUse Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle: (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. Entering an address Multimedia system: Select Navi NaviQNavigation Navigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select Destination DestinationQAddress Address Entry. Entry Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rstate/province, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City City. The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller. X Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, X the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: Rsearch for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or Set as Intermediate Destination. Destination Cancel Active Route Guidance cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. Connecting a mobile phone Prerequisites For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Operating system X Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Multimedia system: Mobile phone: X Select Vehicle VehicleQSystem System Set‐ tingsQActivate tings Activate Bluetooth. Bluetooth X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RText messages and e-mail i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be found at: http:// www.mercedes-benz.com/connect i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Searching for and authorizing (connecting) a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Select Tel/ Tel/®QConnect Connect Device Search for PhonesQStart DeviceQSearch Phones Start Search. Search The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected # Mobile phone is authorized and connected Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia sysX Z Multimedia system Multimedia system: 205 Operating system 206 tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X Multimedia system X Select Connect Device. Device Select a mobile phone from the device list. Media mode General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Further information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) USB stick, MP3 player) RUSB devices (e.g. (Y page 206) RCD RDVD (COMAND) RSD cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Using the device list Multimedia system: Select Media MediaQDevices Devices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played. X Inserting/removing an SD card Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. ! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is on the control panel. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. Removing an SD card Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected. X Remove the SD card. X Connecting USB devices There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 206). Stowage areas G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following notes on loading and transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into place. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. RHook in the cargo net when loading. RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor is 55 lbs (25 kg). RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. ! Do not position the load on one part of the folding cargo compartment floor only. The maximum load capacity of the folding cargo compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg). Distribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging the cargo compartment floor. Place a solid board under the load if necessary. Please note that the load on the cargo compartment floor will be increased when the load is lashed down. Stowage areas Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. RAlways stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. REnsure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). Z Stowage and features Loading guidelines 207 Stowage areas 208 Stowage compartments in the front Stowage and features Glove box To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. There is a pen holder at the top of the glove box flap. X Eyeglasses compartment X To open: press marking :. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front center console X To open: press the marking on cover :. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an ashtray in the center console instead of a storage compartment. Stowage compartment in front of the armrest (vehicles with automatic transmission) X To open: press the marking on cover :. i You can remove the non-slip mat and the insert for cleaning. When removing the insert you will have to overcome some slight resistance. Stowage areas 209 Stowage compartment under the armrest To open: on vehicles with movable armrests, make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost position. X Press button : and fold the armrest up. X Depending on the vehicle equipment, the armrest can be moved backwards or forwards in a longitudinal direction. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage compartment: a multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot and 2 USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate operating instructions. To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards. Stowage space in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear center console Stowage compartment under the driver's seat and front-passenger seat G WARNING If you exceed the maximum load for the stowage compartment, the cover may not be able to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Never exceed the maximum permissible load for the stowage compartment. Stow and secure heavy objects in the cargo compartment. The maximum permissible load of the stowage compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.2 kg). X To open: pull down the top of stowage compartment : by the edge of the handle. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be an open stowage space above the stowage compartment. Folding table G WARNING If the folding table is folded out while the vehicle is in motion, passengers can be thrown against it, particularly in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. There is a risk of injury. Fold the folding table away before each journey. ! Do not load the folding table with more than the maximum permissible load of 4.4 lbs (2 kg). Z Stowage and features X Stowage areas 210 To fold out: pull folding table : up in the direction of the arrow to the desired position. X To fold away: push folding table : down onto the backrest. Stowage and features X Parcel nets Stowage nets are located: Rin the front-passenger footwell Ron the back of the driver's and the frontpassenger seat Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 207). To fold forward: gently push the backrest back. X Pull release handle : and fold the backrest fully onto the seat cushion until it engages. X To fold back: gently push the backrest down and pull release handle :. X Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. X Through-loading facility in the rear Folding backrest on the frontpassenger seat G WARNING If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is folded forward, rear seat passengers can come in contact with parts of the seat mechanism. particularly in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction. There is a risk of injury. If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the front-passenger seat is folded forward, they must sit in the rear seat behind the driver. The backrest of the front-passenger seat can be folded forwards to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Once you no longer need the backrest on the front-passenger side to be used as a load surface, fold the backrest back into place. X X To open: fold down seat armrest :. Pull the center head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (Y page 80). Stowage areas Slide locking mechanism = in the direction of the arrow. X Swing flap ; fully to the side. Flap ; is held open by a magnet. X 211 Folding the rear seat backrest forwards and back Folding the rear seat backrests forward To close: swing flap ; in the cargo compartment back until it engages. X Fold armrest : up fully if necessary. X Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). Cargo compartment enlargement G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Fully insert the backrest head restraints if necessary (Y page 81). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ; of the seat backrest forwards. Corresponding seat backrest : is released. X Fold backrest : forwards. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. ! Before folding the backrest in the rear compartment forwards, make sure that the rear compartment armrest and the cupholder are folded in. They may otherwise be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Z Stowage and features Important safety notes Stowage areas 212 Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 81). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load. Securing loads Cargo tie-down rings Stowage and features General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 207). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Cargo compartment : Cargo tie-down rings Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. : Bag hook Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover. ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the cargo compartment cover. ! When removing and installing the cargo compartment cover, ensure that its end caps do not scrape the light-colored parts of the vehicle. The cargo compartment cover is located behind the rear bench seat backrest. Stowage areas Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover 213 To install: set cargo compartment cover : on the right or left-hand side in anchorage ;. X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo compartment cover : and insert cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Cargo net To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle : and clip it into retainers ; on the left and right. X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment cover from retainers ; on the left and right and guide it forwards by grab handle : until it is fully retracted. X Installing/removing the cargo compartment cover G WARNING On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo net. It is important to use a cargo net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net when transporting loads. Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attaching and tightening the cargo net To remove: make sure that the cargo compartment cover is rolled up. X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow on the right or left-hand side using grip = on the lower edge. X Push cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X Remove cargo compartment cover : upwards. X You have two options for hooking in the cargo net: Rwith cargo compartment enlargement: the brackets are behind the B‑pillar and the cargo tie-down rings to tension the net are on the sides of the rear-compartment footwell. Rwithout cargo compartment enlargement: the brackets are behind the C-pillar and the cargo tie-down rings to tension the net are in the cargo compartment (Y page 212). The cargo net is located in the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor (Y page 214). Z Stowage and features Important safety notes Stowage areas 214 Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the cargo net. X Unroll and unfold the cargo net. The joints on the upper and lower guide rod should engage audibly. X striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey. ! The maximum load capacity of the stowage Stowage and features well under the cargo compartment floor is 55 lbs (25 kg). There is a stowage area for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, a folding box, etc. underneath the cargo compartment floor. Opening/closing the cargo compartment floor Example cargo net installed behind the C-pillar (without cargo compartment enlargement) To attach and tighten: insert guide rod : into bracket ;. X Attach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-down ring and pull down on the loose end of the lashing strap until the cargo net is taut. X Fold up the two Velcro fasteners on the ends of the lashing straps and press them firmly onto the lashing straps above the belt clamps. X After driving a short distance, check the tension of the cargo net and retighten it if necessary. X To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp = up to reduce the tension in the lashing strap. X Unhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-down ring. X Detach guide rod : from bracket ;. X To stow:press the red button on the upper and lower guide rod. X Fold the cargo net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo net holder. X To open: open the tailgate. Holding ribbing ;, press handle : downwards. Handle : folds up. X Swing the cargo compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the cargo compartment cover. X X Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor Important safety notes G WARNING If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus X Fold out hook = on the underside of the cargo compartment floor. Stowage areas 215 i Carry out this step using both hands. To lower: raise cargo compartment floor ; slightly using handle : and pull it towards you. X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again slowly. Whilst doing so, press the cargo compartment floor into the lower level. Cargo compartment floor ; engages in the lower position. X Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's upper seal ?. To close: detach hook = from upper seal ?. X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor. X Fold the cargo compartment floor down. X Press the cargo compartment floor down until it engages. X Setting the height of the cargo compartment floor The stowage well under the cargo compartment floor can be increased or decreased in size as necessary. To do this, you can lock the floor at two different heights. The upper catch gives a flat load surface when the rear bench seat is folded forward. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 286). An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Attaching the roof carrier To raise: using handle :, lift up cargo compartment floor ; in the direction of arrow = and pull it upwards. X Lower cargo compartment floor ; again. To do this, push the cargo compartment floor away so that it engages in the guide on the upper level. Cargo compartment floor ; engages in the upper position. X Z Stowage and features X Features 216 Open and fold the covers : upwards carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X REnsure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of Features Cup holder Important safety notes Stowage and features G WARNING The cup holder cannot hold a container secure whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst traveling, the container may be flung around and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may be distracted from the traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. G WARNING If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. RAlways stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 207). The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles: Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l) Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l) Cup holder in the front center console The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only. X To remove: carefully pull in upper sections of cup holder : on the driver's and frontpassenger sides until they release. X Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be removed. Features 217 To install: insert cup holder into lateral curved sections ; in the stowage compartment. Insert the cup holder so that the wedge of the upper section of cup holder : faces forwards. X Press the cup holder downwards until it engages on the right and left-hand sides. X Cup holder in the rear seat armrest the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X X Sun visors Overview Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Z Stowage and features ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on Features 218 Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and out. X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. i If you remove the ashtray insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. Stowage and features Rear compartment ashtray Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of cover :. The stowage compartment opens. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To open: pull cover = out by its top edge. To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the direction of arrow ? until it audibly releases. X Lift insert ; up and out. X To install the insert: install insert ; from above into the holder and press down until it engages. X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: 12 V sockets General notes Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If the sockets are used for a very long time the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. X Rthe Socket in the front center console Ra Vehicles with a stowage compartment cover: press the lower section of the cover. The stowage compartment opens. X Lift up the cover of the socket. hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Features Pull the cover out by the top of the handle edge. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Socket in the cargo compartment X Lift up the cover of socket :. mbrace General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the multimedia system's volume control. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Z Stowage and features Socket in the rear compartment center console 219 220 Features Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING Stowage and features It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 219). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ;. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. X X or To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing SOS button ;, you do not know if mbrace has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To make a call: press Roadside assistance call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside assistanc button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The display of the multimedia system indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 224). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside assistance call, if: Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside assistance call button is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button X To make a call: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Z 221 Stowage and features Features 222 Features Stowage and features The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be established, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The display of the multimedia system indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears on the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X SelectYes Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. Features Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the Route Assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field. X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website. Calling up a transmitted destination address To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address found on Google Maps™ can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X SelectYes Yes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles. Specifying and sending the destination address Vehicle remote opening Search & Send General notes Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. X To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: X X You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Z Stowage and features The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. 223 224 Features Stowage and features Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be valet locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®, Android™) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified. Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ cle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehi‐ cle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions Features When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ nection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 28). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 24). Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the Do you want to start route guidance? Destination Received destination has been saved in "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No No, the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Select Start Start. Route guidance starts. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Z Stowage and features received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel Cancel, the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely. 225 226 Features Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener Stowage and features General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not leave the engine running while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 26). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. Programming Programming the buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 226). Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the garage door drive. X To start program mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in program mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. Features Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 226). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X X Get into the vehicle. Press previously programed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not detected during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) as you follow the programming steps. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You Z Stowage and features To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 227). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X 227 228 Features should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowage and features Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of remote control A for the garage door drive. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from buttons ; to ? which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control A is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. X Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Compass Calling up the compass Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. : Rear-view mirror ; Compass display = Opening The compass displays in which compass direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE NE, E, SE, S, SW SE SW, W or NW NW. Features To receive a correct compass display reading, the magnetic field zone must be set and the compass calibrated. 229 Magnetic field zone maps North America Setting the compass Set your location using the magnetic field zone maps (Y page 229). X Push a round pen into opening = for approximately three seconds. The magnetic field zone currently selected appears in compass display ;. X To select the magnetic field zone: push a round pen into opening = until the desired magnetic field zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ; changes direction, the magnetic field zone has been selected. Stowage and features X Calibrating the compass Notes In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following: Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. South America Calibrating Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pin into opening = for approximately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in compass display ;. X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h). When the calibration has been successfully completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ;. X Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Z Features 230 Stowage and features the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the seat backwards. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press safety catch knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Engine compartment Hood Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment may be very hot, e.g. the drive system and radiator. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. If possible, let the drive system cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment may be very hot, e.g. the drive system and radiator. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. If possible, let the drive system cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Make sure that the windshield wipers are switched off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rnever Z Maintenance and care Engine compartment 231 Engine compartment 232 Reach into the gap between the hood and the radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to the left. X Raise the hood. X Maintenance and care X X Pull support strut ? out of bracket A. Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yellow retaining clip =. Closing the hood Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time, remove support strut ? from yellow retaining clip =. X Swing support strut ? down and press it into bracket A until it engages. X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Do not press the hood closed. Open the hood again and close it with a little more force. X Checking and adding other service products Checking coolant level G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure. ! The coolant may only be checked and cor- rected when the engine is cool (coolant temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †). Checking the coolant when the coolant temperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may result in damage to the engine or to the engine cooling system. Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the drive system has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 104 ‡ (40 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Slowly turn cap : counter-clockwise to relieve excess pressure. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 284). X Windshield washer system G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment may be very hot, e.g. the drive system and radiator. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. ASSYST PLUS G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 188). Further information on windshield washer fluid/ antifreeze (Y page 285). X X ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. You can find information on the type of service and service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. days A due RService A overdue by .. days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. RService Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages Switch on the ignition. Press the = or ; button to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X X Z Maintenance and care If possible, let the drive system cool down and only touch the components described in the following. 233 234 Care Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Maintenance and care ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Service work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. This can be the case, for example, when driving frequently in mountainous areas or on poor road surfaces. In these or similar operating conditions have the interior filter, for example, changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. Care car wash, make sure that the selector lever is in position N, otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed/the airflow control is set to position 0). Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTires RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. RElectrical components RBattery RConnectors RLamps RSeals RTrim RVentilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. ! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm) between the parts of the vehicle covered with the film and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate Z Maintenance and care ! When washing your vehicle in a tow-through 235 Maintenance and care 236 Care care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more specifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should ideally be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Care ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood. Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. Z Maintenance and care Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. 237 Care 238 Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. Maintenance and care Rabrasive X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To clean the rear view camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Care X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever 239 Care 240 ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Maintenance and care X Flat tire Where will I find...? Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit Vehicle tool kit Open the tailgate. Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (Y page 214). X Remove the tire-change tool kit. The tire-change tool kit contains: RJack RLug wrench ROne pair of gloves RFolding wheel chock Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is located in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tirechange tool kit is in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RAlignment bolt Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : Tire inflation compressor ; Tire sealant filler bottle = Towing eye Open the tailgate. Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (Y page 214). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 243) or remove it. Towing eye = is located under tire inflation compressor :. X X X X Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: with run-flat proper- RMOExtended tires (tires ties) (Y page 242) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 241) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 275). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the drive system. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being Breakdown assistance General notes 241 242 Flat tire changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) Breakdown assistance General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 270). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 185). Rcheck in the display mes- the tire for damage. driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RVehicle speed RRoad condition ROutside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Rif When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rtype and Rthe "MOExtended" marking If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Flat tire ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Using the TIREFIT kit Breakdown assistance TIREFIT kit G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 243 Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the cargo compartment floor (Y page 241). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X Z Flat tire 244 Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of the tire inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler bottle : until the connector engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. Yellow cap A and both hooks must engage. Breakdown assistance X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert plug = into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 218). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). X Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 245). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 244). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Flat tire G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Z Breakdown assistance Tire pressure reached 245 Batteries 246 Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Batteries 12 V battery – important safety notes Breakdown assistance Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the batteries, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The battery terminal clamps can remain under voltage even after being disconnected. If work on the battery is carried out incorrectly, a short-circuit may result. There is a risk of fire. Always have work on the batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Never disconnect a battery yourself. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You Rin should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 59) and (Y page 62). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you rub the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. Batteries is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Only replace a battery with a battery that has been recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. After an interruption to the power supply, such as due to a discharged battery, you must reset the clock via the multimedia system. You can Z Breakdown assistance RIt 247 248 Batteries find further information in the separate operating instructions. Charging the 12‑volt battery Breakdown assistance G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 249). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 249). If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. High-voltage battery – important safety notes G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a critical value. In this case flammable gas escapes through a ventilation valve on the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. Jump-starting If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary for longer periods, connect it to a power supply. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. i Very low or very high outside temperatures can impair the function of the high-voltage battery (Y page 119). This can also occur when the vehicle engine is switched off (Y page 119). Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. Z Breakdown assistance The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. RDo not handle high-voltage components or the orange cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. RDo not touch high-voltage components or the orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system when a vehicle has been involved in a crash. RDo not touch any damaged components or the damaged orange cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltage electrical system components that are marked with a warning sticker. Do not leave the vehicle parked for longer than 14 days with a high-voltage battery condition of charge below 20%. You can check the condition of charge in the charge level display (Y page 153). 249 250 Jump-starting RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. RNever G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. Breakdown assistance ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine. If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the 12 V battery is discharged, or after the vehicle has been jump-started, the Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer message appears. There is a malfunction in the on-board voltage. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The drive system cannot be started if the 12 V battery is discharged. This is not dependent on whether the high-voltage battery is charged or not. The vehicle cannot be jump-started if the highvoltage battery is discharged. The high-voltage battery must be charged first. The drive system can be started using another vehicle. ROnly use batteries with an equal nominal voltage (12 volts). RMake sure that the battery of the donor vehicle does not have a significantly lower capacity than the discharged battery. RUse jumper cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. RRoute the jumper cables so that they cannot be caught by rotating components in the engine compartment. RDo not disconnect the discharged battery from the vehicle's electrical system. Towing 251 Switch off the engine of both vehicles. Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove battery cover :. X Connect positive terminal ; on the vehicle with the flat battery to positive terminal = of the donor vehicle using the red jumper cable. Begin with the flat battery. X Connect negative terminal ? of the donor vehicle to negative terminal A of the vehicle with the flat battery using the black jumper cable, beginning with donor vehicle's battery B. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Switch on the ignition in the vehicle with the flat battery. X If the drive system cannot be activated immediately, wait for approximately 60 seconds between starting attempts. If the drive system does not start, call a breakdown service. X X i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified Towing Important safety notes G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe ignition is switched off brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 282). ! When Active Brake Assist or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Z Breakdown assistance specialist workshop. 252 Towing ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Breakdown assistance ! Observe the following points when towing with a tow rope: RSecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. REnsure that the tow cable is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow cable in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other road users aware that the vehicle is being towed. ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing eye. RObserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the front axle must be raised or the entire vehicle raised and transported. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button. The transmission may otherwise shift to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door, which could damage the transmission. Observe the legal requirements for the relevant countries when towing away. Make sure that no charging cable is plugged in. The parking lock cannot be released if a charging cable is plugged in. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options: Rtransporting the vehicle As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported. Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. Observe the following notes. The vehicle may not be towed and must always be transported if: Rthe multifunction display is not working Rone of more of the following warning lamps is lit up: - Drive system - 12 V battery Rone or both of the following display messages have appeared: - Stop Switch Engine Off - Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer Ryou have to tow the vehicle over a longer distance than 30 miles (50 km). The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot move the transmission to position N The function of the electric parking brake and the parking lock is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a system malfunction: Rthe electric parking brake may not be applied in certain circumstances, or Rthe transmission may not be shifted to P Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the radio. Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 166). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Towing Installing/removing the towing eye X Installing the towing eye 253 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 110). The transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position N. Release the brake pedal. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 89). X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the stowage space. The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is beneath the tire inflation compressor. X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover : off the opening. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Place the towing eye in the stowage well beneath the cargo compartment floor in the cargo compartment (Y page 241). X Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire inflation compressor. X If the 12 V battery indicator lamp lights up, you must observe the following points: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Apply the electric parking brake. i In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 251). Towing the vehicle with the front axle raised Observe the important safety notes when towing your vehicle with the front axle raised (Y page 251). ! The ignition must be switched off if the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and damage the brake system. Z Breakdown assistance X Fuses 254 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 110). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the automatic locking (Y page 166). X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 89). X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Breakdown assistance X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 251). ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. The transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (Y page 110). X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position N. X Release the brake pedal. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the automatic locking (Y page 166). Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 89). X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Transporting the vehicle All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Shift the transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other- Fuses ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 256). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Before changing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box in the engine compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the front-passenger footwell (Y page 256). X Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Open the hood. Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: unclip hood release cable ? from bracket =. X Open retaining clamps ;. X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X X To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the back into openings A on the fuse box. X Slide hood release cable ? to the side and hold if necessary. X Fold down cover :. X Clip hood release cable ? into bracket =. X Z Breakdown assistance wise, components or systems could be damaged. 255 Fuses 256 X X Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close. Close the hood. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell To open: open the front-passenger door. Remove the floormat. X Fold out perforated floor covering : in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance X X To release cover =, press retaining clamp ;. X Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow to the catch. X Remove cover = forwards. Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the lower right-hand side of cover =. X To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side of the fuse box into the retainer. Cover = engages in the retainers. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audibly. X Fold back perforated floor covering :. X Install the floormats. X Operation G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 279). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 266) Rin the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap (Y page 124) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 260) Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Information on driving Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Z Wheels and tires Important safety notes 257 Wheels and tires 258 Operation Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 258). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 260). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Marking : shows where bar indicator ; for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe here the "MOExtended tires (tires Winter operation MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure monitor and only on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 242). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 275). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 260). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 265). Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are mounted on the rear wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion Z Wheels and tires with run-flat characteristics)" section (Y page 242). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. 259 260 Tire pressure to the vehicle body or to chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever mount snow chains on the rear wheels Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the front wheels. Wheels and tires ! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels". For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 279). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). RDo not use Parking Pilot when snow chains are installed (Y page 142). You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 62) when pulling away with snow chains installed . You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif i The data on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure 261 Tire and Loading Information placard : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 266). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the charge socket flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 270). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher speeds i The tire pressures for increased loads and/ or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires Tire pressure table 262 Tire pressure Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap (Y page 124) Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on energy consumption Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Tire pressure Maximum tire pressures : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 260). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 260). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap (Y page 124) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 260). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display, see illustration (example). For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 265). Z Wheels and tires Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage 263 264 Tire pressure Wheels and tires Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- minated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 260). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a substantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 265). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 260). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe Tire pressure Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. Serv.menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message is shown. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. X Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐ ure message appears, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 185). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 260). Additional tire pressure for various operating conditions can be found in the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap (Y page 124). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 109). Z Wheels and tires the information on display messages (Y page 185). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. 265 Loading the vehicle 266 Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐ sure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The multifunction display shows the Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message. X If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: Wheels and tires X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. : B-pillar, driver's side Loading the vehicle Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating 267 Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of Z Wheels and tires Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. X 268 Loading the vehicle 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 266). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Wheels and tires Step 2 Step 3 Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 266). All about wheels and tires All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. RTraction i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction G WARNING Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Z Wheels and tires Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. 269 270 All about wheels and tires Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 258). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 259). Tire labeling Overview Temperature Wheels and tires G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (Y page 274) ; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- cation Number (Y page 273) Maximum load rating (Y page 272) Maximum tire pressures (Y page 263) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 273) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 270) D Load index (Y page 272) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the All about wheels and tires : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code:tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 266). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 272). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 272). Speed rating:speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in Z Wheels and tires tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 271 All about wheels and tires 272 Wheels and tires the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR" and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) V i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 100 mph (160 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. 1 Or M+S i for winter tires. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 279). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire. Speed rating (Y page 270). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating All about wheels and tires Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 266). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 273 Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire characteristics This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 279). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Z Wheels and tires US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. 274 All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Wheels and tires Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. Changing a wheel PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. 275 Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Changing a wheel Bead Flat tire The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 241) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 242). Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Z Wheels and tires Tread Changing a wheel 276 Wheels and tires Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 275). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary. Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the drive system. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 128). X Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires against oil and grease. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 241). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Changing a wheel 277 Observe the following when raising the vehicle: X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! Position a suitable jack correctly on the intended jacking points. If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may be damaged. The jacking points are recesses in the lower door sill. They can only be seen from underneath. There is one located behind each of the front wheel arches and in front of the rear wheel arches. Position the jack in the jacking points so that when viewed from the side, the jack is in the vertical position. cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the drive system when the vehicle is raised. RNever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. ! Position a suitable jack only on the jacking points intended for this purpose. Never position the jack on the high-voltage battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on the high-voltage battery. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the high-voltage battery. Also observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section. Z Wheels and tires RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- Changing a wheel 278 X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. X Unscrew the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Jacking points Wheels and tires The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Take ratchet wrench ? out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack = so that the letters AUF are visible. X Position jack = at jacking point ;. X Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 275). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Wheel and tire combinations Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X 279 The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the vehicle again. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 260). When you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. All wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor (USA only): all mounted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Lowering the vehicle The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible. X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). Wheel and tire combinations General notes You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 260). The value on the wheel is valid. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherZ Wheels and tires G WARNING 280 Wheel and tire combinations wise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the charge socket flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 260). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tire (summer tires, MOExtended tires, winter tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 242). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle electronics Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING 281 In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender i On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supplement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: 282 Identification plates The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Technical data Frequency band Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) : VIN ; Paint code Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) : VIN ; Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Service products and filling capacities from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) 283 Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 282). = Emissions control information plate ? VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) Electric motor number The electric motor number can be found at the bottom of the electric motor. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RLubricants, e.g. transmission oil RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must match. Only use products recommended by MercedesBenz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Z Technical data Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. You will see VIN ;. X 284 Service products and filling capacities Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Brake fluid Technical data G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 283). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 283). The coolant is a mixture of water and corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs the following tasks: RAnti-corrosion protection RAntifreeze protection RRaising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †) Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively Mercedes-Benz recommends a coolant or corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection. Service products and filling capacities i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model Capacity All models Windshield washer system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. 285 Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the left, on the underside of the hood. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 283). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- Technical data ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Warning symbol : advises you about: RPossible dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Z 286 Vehicle data Filling capacities Model : Max. headroom ; Opening height All models 75.3 in (1912 mm) 79.6 in (2021 mm) Missing values were not available at time of going to print. All models Capacity Refrigerant PAG oil Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload The range depends on the drive program selected and can vary due to: Rhigher and lower outside temperatures Rthe style of driving Ractivated electrical consumers Technical data i Further information on the range can be found in the Trip menu (Y page 158). Dimensions and weights Missing values were not available at time of going to print. All models Vehicle length 171.6 in (4358 mm) Vehicle height 63.1 in (1604 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.1 in (2010 mm) Wheelbase 106.3 in (2699 mm) Turning radius 36.1 ft (11.0 m) Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load High-voltage battery Model Energy content Lithium-ion 28.0 kWh Charge time with110-120 V(12 A) Approx. 28.7 h Charge time with240 V(32 A) (wallbox) Approx. 4.4 h Charge time with240 V(40 A) (wallbox) Approx. 3.5 h 287 288